178
FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF COASTAL ALASKA 2009 Forest Inventory and Analysis Program Pacific Northwest Research Station USDA Forest Service

FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF …€¦ · 07/11/2011  · FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF COASTAL ALASKA 2009 Forest Inventory and Analysis Program

  • Upload
    others

  • View
    2

  • Download
    0

Embed Size (px)

Citation preview

Page 1: FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF …€¦ · 07/11/2011  · FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF COASTAL ALASKA 2009 Forest Inventory and Analysis Program

FIELD INSTRUCTIONS

FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF

COASTAL ALASKA

2009

Forest Inventory and Analysis Program

Pacific Northwest Research Station

USDA Forest Service

Page 2: FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF …€¦ · 07/11/2011  · FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF COASTAL ALASKA 2009 Forest Inventory and Analysis Program

Annual Inventory 2009 TABLE OF CONTENTS

ii

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Based on version 3.0 of the National CORE Field Guide

SUMMARY OF MAJOR CHANGES FROM 2008 FIELD GUIDE ............................................. VII

I. INTRODUCTION .......................................................................................................................1

GENERAL DESCRIPTION ........................................................................................................2 UNITS OF MEASURE ...............................................................................................................3

II. SAFETY ...................................................................................................................................5

SAFETY IN THE WOODS .........................................................................................................5 SAFETY IN AND AROUND THE HELICOPTER ......................................................................6 SAFETY ON THE ROAD ..........................................................................................................6 IMPORTANT PHONE NUMBERS.............................................................................................7

III. LOCATING THE PLOT ...........................................................................................................9

OVERVIEW OF LOCATING THE PLOT ON THE GROUND....................................................9 STEPS TO RE-LOCATE THE PLOT ......................................................................................10

A. First time visit to the field sample location..................................................................11 B. Re-visit of the field sample location .............................................................................13

REPLACEMENT PLOT (LOST PLOT) ...................................................................................15

IV. PLOT LAYOUT AND REFERENCING .................................................................................17

PLOT MONUMENTATION ......................................................................................................17 1. The Reference Point (RP)...............................................................................................17 2. Monumenting Plot Center (PC)......................................................................................18 3. Witness Trees .................................................................................................................19 4. Other Plot Monumentation Notes ..................................................................................21

MAINTAINING PLOT INTEGRITY ..........................................................................................22 PLOT LAYOUT AND REFERENCING MQO ..........................................................................23

V. PLOT LEVEL DATA ..............................................................................................................24

- PLOT ATTRIBUTES -............................................................................................................25 Item 1--STATE ..................................................................................................................25 Item 2--PLOT NUMBER....................................................................................................26 Item 3--QA STATUS .........................................................................................................26 Item 4--PNW PLOT KIND .................................................................................................27 Item 5--AK Data Source ...................................................................................................27 Item 6--PLOT STATUS .....................................................................................................28 Item 7--AK PLOT NONSAMPLED REASON (Plot Nons Rsn)........................................28 Item 8--SUBPLOTS EXAMINED.......................................................................................29 Item 9--AK Condition Class Status 1 (CC1 Status) .......................................................30 Item 10--AK Estimated Nonsampled Land Cover Type (NonS Land Cvr) ...................30 Item 11--AK Previous Plot Number (Prev Plt Num).......................................................31 Item 12--AK Start Date .....................................................................................................31 Item 13--HORIZONTAL DISTANCE TO IMPROVED ROAD (Road Distance)................31 Item 14--WATER ON PLOT (Water Plot) .........................................................................32 Item 15--CREW TYPE.......................................................................................................33

Page 3: FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF …€¦ · 07/11/2011  · FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF COASTAL ALASKA 2009 Forest Inventory and Analysis Program

Annual Inventory 2009 TABLE OF CONTENTS

iii

Item 16--PNW Crew Leader (CLead) ...............................................................................33 Item 17--PNW Crew Member 1 - PNW Crew Member 5 (Name1-Name5) .....................33 Item 18--PNW Landowner Plot Summary Request (Own Request) .............................33 Item 19--END DATE..........................................................................................................34 Item 20--AK Transportation to Plot ................................................................................34 Item 21--PNW Travel Time To Plot..................................................................................34 Item 22--PNW Measurement Time On Plot.....................................................................35 Item 23--PNW Travel Time From Plot .............................................................................35 Item 24--AK P2/P3 Plot Type (P2/P3 Plot) ......................................................................35 Item 25--PLOT - LEVEL NOTES ......................................................................................36 Item 26--PNW Periodic Plot Number (Old Loc ID) .........................................................36 Item 27--AK Year of Previous Inventory(Prev Year)......................................................36 Item 28--FIELD GUIDE VERSION (Core Man Ver)..........................................................36 Item 29--PNW Data Recorder Program Version #(PDR Version) .................................36

- GPS INFO -............................................................................................................................37 Item 30--AK GPS Location Type (L) ...............................................................................38 Item 31--AK GPS UNIT TYPE (T) .....................................................................................38 Item 32--AK GPS SERIAL NUMBER (ID/Ser#)................................................................38 Item 33--AK GPS DATUM ................................................................................................39 Item 34--AK COORDINATE SYSTEM (C) ........................................................................39 Item 35--AK GPS LATITUDE DEGREES (Lt) ..................................................................39 Item 36--AK GPS LATITUDE MINUTES ..........................................................................39 Item 37--AK GPS LONGITUDE DEGREES (Long)..........................................................39 Item 38--AK GPS LONGITUDE MINUTES .......................................................................40 Item 39--AK NUMBER OF READINGS (Num) .................................................................40 Item 40--AK GPS ERROR (Err)........................................................................................40 Item 41--AK GPS ELEVATION (Elevat) ...........................................................................40 Item 42--AK AZIMUTH TO PLOT CENTER (Azm)...........................................................41 Item 43--AK DISTANCE TO PLOT CENTER (Dist) .........................................................41 Item 44--AK GPS Notes ...................................................................................................41

- RP INFO - ..............................................................................................................................42 Item 45--AK RP Type (T) ..................................................................................................42 Item 46--PNW RP Species (Spc) .....................................................................................42 Item 47--PNW RP Diameter (Diam) .................................................................................43 Item 48--PNW RP Azimuth(Azm).....................................................................................43 Item 49--PNW RP Horizontal Distance (Dist) .................................................................43 Item 50--PNW RP Az/Dist to Subplot # (S) .....................................................................43 Item 51--AK RP Notes ......................................................................................................44

VI. CONDITION CLASS .............................................................................................................45

A. DETERMINATION OF CONDITION CLASS .......................................................................46 B. CONDITION CLASS STATUS DEFINITIONS.....................................................................47 C. CONDITION CLASS ATTRIBUTES ....................................................................................50 D. DELINEATING CONDITION CLASSES DIFFERING IN CONDITION STATUS .................50

Item 1--CONDITION CLASS NUMBER ............................................................................53 Item 2--CONDITION CLASS STATUS (Cond Status) .....................................................54 Item 3--AK CONDITION NONSAMPLED REASON (CC NonS Rsn) ..............................54 Item 4--AK Estimated Nonsample Land Cover Type (CC NonS Lnd Cvr) ...................56

Page 4: FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF …€¦ · 07/11/2011  · FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF COASTAL ALASKA 2009 Forest Inventory and Analysis Program

Annual Inventory 2009 TABLE OF CONTENTS

iv

E. DELINEATING CONDITION CLASSES WITHIN ACCESSIBLE FOREST LAND ..............56 Item 5--RESERVED STATUS (Resv Status) ...................................................................60 Item 6--OWNER GROUP (Own Group) ...........................................................................60 Item 7--FOREST TYPE .....................................................................................................60 Item 8--STAND SIZE CLASS (Stand Size) ......................................................................61 Item 9--REGENERATION STATUS (Regen Status)........................................................63 Item 10--TREE DENSITY ..................................................................................................63

F. ANCILLARY (NON-DELINEATING) VARIABLES ..............................................................64 Item 11--OWNER CLASS .................................................................................................64 Item 12--ARTIFICIAL REGENERATION SPECIES (Regen Spc) ....................................65 Item 13--STAND AGE .......................................................................................................66 Item 14--DISTURBANCE 1 (Dstrb 1) ...............................................................................67 Item 15--DISTURBANCE YEAR 1 (Distrb1 Yr)................................................................68 Item 16--DISTURBANCE 2 (Dstrb 2) ...............................................................................68 Item 17--DISTURBANCE YEAR 2 (Dstrb2 Yr).................................................................68 Item 18--DISTURBANCE 3 (Dstrb 3) ...............................................................................68 Item 19--DISTURBANCE YEAR 3 (Dstrb3 Yr).................................................................68 Item 20--TREATMENT 1 ...................................................................................................68 Item 21--TREATMENT YEAR 1 (Trtmnt1 Yr)...................................................................69 Item 22--TREATMENT 2 ...................................................................................................69 Item 23--TREATMENT YEAR 2 (Trtmnt2 Yr)...................................................................69 Item 24--TREATMENT 3 ...................................................................................................69 Item 25--TREATMENT YEAR 3 (Trtmnt3 Yr)...................................................................70 Item 26--PHYSIOGRAPHIC CLASS (Physio Cl) .............................................................70 Item 27--PNW PRESENT NONFOREST LAND USE (NonF Land Use)..........................71 Item 28--CONDITION CLASS NOTES .............................................................................73

VII. SUBPLOT INFORMATION..................................................................................................74

-SUBPLOT ATTRIBUTES-......................................................................................................75 Item 1--SUBPLOT NUMBER ............................................................................................76 Item 2--SUBPLOT PLOT STATUS (Sbplt Status)...........................................................76 Item 3--AK SUBPLOT NONSAMPLED REASON (NonS Reason) .................................76 Item 4--AK Estimated Nonsample Land Cover Type (NonS Land Cvr) .......................77 Item 5--SUBPLOT CENTER CONDITION ........................................................................78 Item 6--MICROPLOT CENTER CONDITION (Microplot Cond) ......................................78 Item 7--SUBPLOT SLOPE (Slope)...................................................................................78 Item 8--SUBPLOT ASPECT (Aspect) ..............................................................................79 Item 9--SNOW/WATER DEPTH (Snow/Water Dept) .......................................................79 Item 10--AK Vegetation Community Description for Label ..........................................80 Item 11--SUBPLOT NOTES..............................................................................................80

- INVASIVE PLANT SPECIES - ...............................................................................................81 Item 1--AK Subplot Number ............................................................................................81 Item 2--AK Species (NRCS Code) ...................................................................................82 Item 3--AK Percent Cover................................................................................................83 Item 4--AK Unique Species Number...............................................................................84 Item 5--AK Specimen Officially Collected......................................................................84 Item 6--AK Specimen Label Number ..............................................................................84 Item 7--AK Specimen Not Officially Collected Reason Code .......................................84 Item 8--AK Invasive Plant Notes .....................................................................................85

Page 5: FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF …€¦ · 07/11/2011  · FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF COASTAL ALASKA 2009 Forest Inventory and Analysis Program

Annual Inventory 2009 TABLE OF CONTENTS

v

- SUBPLOT MAPPING - ..........................................................................................................87 Item 1--SUBPLOT NUMBER ............................................................................................88 Item 2--PLOT TYPE (P) ....................................................................................................88 Item 3--CONTRASTING CONDITION (C).........................................................................89 Item 4--LEFT AZIMUTH (LAzm).......................................................................................89 Item 5--RIGHT AZIMUTH (RAzm) ....................................................................................89 Item 6--CORNER AZIMUTH (CAzm) ................................................................................89 Item 7--CORNER DISTANCE (Cdist) ...............................................................................90 Item 8--BOUNDARY NOTES ............................................................................................91

- SEEDLING DATA -................................................................................................................92 Item 1--SUBPLOT NUMBER ............................................................................................92 Item 2--SPECIES ..............................................................................................................92 Item 3--CONDITION CLASS NUMBER ............................................................................93 Item 4--SEEDLING COUNT ..............................................................................................93 Item 5--SEEDLING NOTES ..............................................................................................93

VIII. TREE AND SAPLING DATA ..............................................................................................94

Item 1--SUBPLOT NUMBER ............................................................................................97 Item 2--TREE RECORD NUMBER (Trn) ..........................................................................97 Item 3--CONDITION CLASS NUMBER (C) ......................................................................98 Item 4--AK PREVIOUS TREE STATUS (p) ......................................................................99 Item 5--PNW PRESENT TREE STATUS (S) ....................................................................99 Item 6--PNW Subplot Tally Tree Witness Flag.............................................................101 Item 7--AK STANDING DEAD ........................................................................................101 Item 8--AK RECONCILE (I) ............................................................................................102 Item 9--AK Previous Species (sPc) ..............................................................................103 Item 10--SPECIES (sPc).................................................................................................103 Item 11--AK Previous Azimuth (aZm) ...........................................................................104 Item 12--AZIMUTH (aZm) ...............................................................................................105 Item 13--AK Previous Horizontal Distance (Hdis) .......................................................105 Item 14--HORIZONTAL DISTANCE (Hdis) ....................................................................106 Item 15--PNW Slope Distance to Witness Tree or Object (sdi) ..................................106 Item 16--AK Previous Diameter at Breast Height (pdia) .............................................106 Item 17--DIAMETER (Diam) ...........................................................................................107 Item 18--AK DIAMETER CHECK (c) ..............................................................................112 Item 19--PNW 10-Yr Increment (Inc) .............................................................................112 Item 20--ACTUAL LENGTH (alE)...................................................................................113 Item 21--AK LENGTH METHOD.....................................................................................114 Item 22--PNW Previous Length.....................................................................................114 Item 23--TOTAL LENGTH (tLe)......................................................................................114 Item 24--COMPACTED CROWN RATIO (cR) ................................................................115 Item 25--CROWN CLASS (c)..........................................................................................115 Item 26--ROTTEN/MISSING CULL (rc) ..........................................................................116 Item 27--AK Tree Class (E) ............................................................................................117 Item 28--DECAY CLASS (d)...........................................................................................118 Item 29--AK MORTALITY YEAR ....................................................................................119 Item 30--AK CAUSE OF DEATH (cd) ............................................................................119 Item 31--TREE NOTES ...................................................................................................120

Page 6: FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF …€¦ · 07/11/2011  · FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF COASTAL ALASKA 2009 Forest Inventory and Analysis Program

Annual Inventory 2009 TABLE OF CONTENTS

vi

IX. SITE TREE INFORMATION................................................................................................121

Item 1--AK SITE/AGE TREE NUMBER (No)..................................................................123 Item 2--SUBPLOT NUMBER (Sb) ..................................................................................124 Item 3--AK Site/age Tree Status....................................................................................124 Item 4--AK Site/age Tree Type ......................................................................................124 Item 5--AK Questionable Site/age Tree Flag................................................................125 Item 6--CONDITION CLASS LIST (C) ............................................................................125 Item 7--AK Tally Tree Number (Trn) .............................................................................126 Item 8--AZIMUTH (Azm) .................................................................................................126 Item 9--HORIZONTAL DISTANCE (Hdst) ......................................................................126 Item 10--SPECIES (Spc) ................................................................................................126 Item 11--DIAMETER (Dbh) .............................................................................................127 Item 12--SITE TREE LENGTH (Ht).................................................................................127 Item 13--TREE AGE AT DIAMETER (Age) ....................................................................127 Item 14--AK Age Determination Method ......................................................................128 Item 15--SITE TREE NOTES ..........................................................................................129

X. COORDINATES (GPS)........................................................................................................130

A. OVERVIEW.......................................................................................................................130 B. WHEN AND WHERE TO COLLECT READINGS ............................................................130 C. RECORDING GPS INFORMATION .................................................................................130 D. GPS KEYPAD LAYOUT AND COMMANDS....................................................................131 E. GPS SETUP OPTIONS.....................................................................................................132 F. OPERATING THE GPS ON PLOT....................................................................................133 G. COLLECTING COORDINATES AWAY FROM PLOT CENTER......................................133 H. WAYPOINTS ....................................................................................................................134 I. NAVIGATING WITH THE GPS ..........................................................................................135 J. BATTERIES ......................................................................................................................136

XI. LASER 200 INSTRUCTIONS .............................................................................................137

A. OVERVIEW.......................................................................................................................137 B. BASIC OPERATION.........................................................................................................137 C. SETTINGS ........................................................................................................................137 D. FILTER AND REFLECTORS............................................................................................138 E. DISTANCES AND % SLOPE............................................................................................138 F. TREE HEIGHTS ................................................................................................................138

APPENDIX 1 -- RADIO INFORMATION ..................................................................................140

APPENDIX 2 -- METRIC EQUIVALENTS................................................................................147

APPENDIX 3 -- SLOPE CORRECTION TABLE......................................................................149

APPENDIX 4 -- DETERMINATION OF STOCKING VALUES FOR LAND USE CLASSI. ......150

APPENDIX 5 -- GLOSSARY....................................................................................................154

APPENDIX 6 -- CUBIC FOOT VOLUME TABLE.....................................................................159

APPENDIX 7 -- FORMS ...........................................................................................................160

APPENDIX 8 -- EQUIPMENT CHECKLIST .............................................................................166

APPENDIX 9 – QA\QC CHECKPLOTS………………………………………………………….... 167

Page 7: FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF …€¦ · 07/11/2011  · FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF COASTAL ALASKA 2009 Forest Inventory and Analysis Program

Annual Inventory 2009 CHANGES FROM 2008

vii

Summary of Major Changes from 2008 Field Guide INTRODUCTION

No significant changes SAFETY

Phone numbers and contacts updated LOCATING THE PLOT

No significant changes PLOT LAYOUT AND REFERENCING

No significant changes PLOT LEVEL DATA

No significant changes

CONDITION CLASS No significant changes

SUBPLOT INFORMATION

No significant changes

TREE AND SAPLING DATA Added text to tally suspended seedlings on a separate data form included in the plot

folder for every subplot (see p. 92)

SITE TREES No significant changes

COORDINATES (GPS)

No significant changes LASER 200 INSTRUCTIONS

No significant changes APPENDICES

Added APPENDIX 9 – QA\QC CHECKPLOTS (p.167)

Page 8: FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF …€¦ · 07/11/2011  · FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF COASTAL ALASKA 2009 Forest Inventory and Analysis Program
Page 9: FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF …€¦ · 07/11/2011  · FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF COASTAL ALASKA 2009 Forest Inventory and Analysis Program

Annual Inventory 2009 I. INTRODUCTION

1

I. INTRODUCTION This field guide documents the procedures by the Forest Inventory and Analysis Program (FIA) in the 2009 annual inventory of coastal Alaska. FIA, a program within the Pacific Northwest Research Station (PNW), USDA Forest Service, is one of four Forest Inventory and Analysis work units across the United States. PNW-FIA is responsible for inventorying the forest resources of Alaska, California, Hawaii, Oregon, Pacific Islands, and Washington. Purposes of this field guide This field guide serves two purposes, to:

Instruct field personnel in how to locate and measure field plots in the 2009 annual inventory of coastal Alaska.

Document the field procedures, methods, and codes used in the 2009 field inventory. Organization of this field guide This field guide is structured primarily for use by field personnel. Each chapter corresponds either to a separate function that must be performed in locating and measuring a field plot, or to a particular aspect of data recording that must be completed. The procedures in this field guide are ordered to coincide as much as possible with the order in which field data items are collected and entered into the field data recorder. Some procedures and codes are repeated in multiple chapters of the field guide to minimize the need to refer to additional chapters while collecting data in the standard order. This field guide incorporates the field data collection procedures of the Forest Inventory and Analysis National CORE Field Guide. Instructions in shaded text, and data items in all capital letters describe data items or field procedures that are a part of or similarly related to the National Core Field Guide. Several of those items are still under development, or have unresolved issues at the time of this printing. Temporary regional adjustments and clarifications are noted in italic font within the shaded text. Portions of this field guide which are not shaded are regional variables or procedures which supplement the national core data. Information that is infrequently used or that is included only for documentation, as well as a glossary of terms, is included in the appendices at the end of this field guide. Products PNW-FIA provides information needed by resource planners, policy analysts, and others involved in forest resource decision-making. Data collected in PNW-FIA inventories is summarized, interpreted, analyzed, and published in statistical and analytical reports of national, state, and sub regional scope. PNW-FIA publishes information on area by forest land and owner classes and by degree of urbanization; land use change; timber volume, growth, mortality, and removals; potential forest productivity; opportunities for silvicultural treatment; and associations for wildlife habitat. PNW-FIA also provides data to answer questions about forest resources.

Page 10: FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF …€¦ · 07/11/2011  · FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF COASTAL ALASKA 2009 Forest Inventory and Analysis Program

Annual Inventory 2009 I. INTRODUCTION

2

Research topics The data collected in these inventories represent a wealth of information for both applied and basic questions concerning forest ecosystems. Topics include: the distribution of plant species and their relationship to environment, the incidence of insects and disease in relation to forest type and condition, changes in forest structure in productivity due to disturbance, and improved prediction of forest growth and development on different sites and in response to management. GENERAL DESCRIPTION

The CORE field plot consists of four subplots approximately 1/24 acres in size with a radius of 24.0 feet. The center subplot is subplot 1. Subplots 2, 3, and 4 are located 120.0 feet horizontal (+/- 7 feet) at azimuths of 360, 120, and 240 degrees, respectively, from the center of subplot 1 (see figure below). Subplots are used to collect data on trees with a diameter (at breast height "DBH") of 5.0 inches or greater. Throughout this field guide, use of the word “'plot” refers to the entire set of four subplots. “Plot center” is defined as the center of subplot 1. Each subplot contains a microplot of approximately 1/300 acre in size with a radius of 6.8 feet. The center of the microplot is offset 90 degrees and 12.0 feet horizontal (+/- 1 foot) from each subplot center. Microplots are numbered in the same way as subplots. Microplots are used to select and collect data on saplings (DBH of 1.0 inch through 4.9 inches) and seedlings [DBH less than 1.0 inch in diameter and greater than 0.5 foot in length (conifers) or greater than 1.0 foot in length (hardwoods)].

Page 11: FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF …€¦ · 07/11/2011  · FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF COASTAL ALASKA 2009 Forest Inventory and Analysis Program

Annual Inventory 2009 I. INTRODUCTION

3

From To Horiz. Dist. Azimuth Subplot 1 Subplot 2 120.0 ft. 360 Subplot 1 Subplot 3 120.0 ft. 120 Subplot 1 Subplot 4 120.0 ft. 240 Subplot 2 Subplot 3 207.8 ft. 150 Subplot 2 Subplot 4 207.8 ft. 210 Subplot 3 Subplot 4 207.8 ft. 270 UNITS OF MEASURE The field guide will use ENGLISH units as the measurement system. All azimuths will be magnetic (no declination) Plot Dimensions: Subplot - for selecting trees with diameter ≥ 5.0 inches Radius = 24.0 feet Area = 1,809.56 square feet or approximately 0.04 acre or approximately 1/24 acre Microplot - for counting seedlings and selecting saplings Radius = 6.8 feet Area = 145.27 square feet or approximately 0.003 acre or approximately 1/300 acre The distance between subplot centers is 120.0 feet horizontal. The minimum area needed to qualify as accessible forest land is 1.0 acre. The minimum width to qualify as accessible forest land is 120.0 feet. Tree Limiting Dimensions: Breast height 4.5 feet Stump height 1.0 foot Merchantable top 4.0 inches DOB Minimum conifer seedling length 0.5 feet Minimum hardwood seedling length 1.0 foot Seedling/sapling DBH break 1.0 inch DOB Sapling/tree DBH break 5.0 inch DOB Data are collected on field plots at the following levels: Plot Data that describe the entire cluster of four subplots. Subplot Data that describe a single subplot of a cluster. Condition Class A discrete combination of landscape attributes that describe the environment on all or part of the plot. These attributes include CONDITION CLASS STATUS, RESERVED

Page 12: FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF …€¦ · 07/11/2011  · FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF COASTAL ALASKA 2009 Forest Inventory and Analysis Program

Annual Inventory 2009 I. INTRODUCTION

4

STATUS, OWNER GROUP, FOREST TYPE, STAND SIZE CLASS, REGENERATION STATUS, and TREE DENSITY. Boundary An approximate description of the demarcation line between two condition classes that occur on a single subplot or microplot plot. There is no boundary recorded when the demarcation occurs beyond the fixed radius plots. Tree Data describing saplings with a diameter 1.0 inch through 4.9 inches, and trees with diameter greater than or equal to 5.0 inches Seedling Data describing trees with a diameter less than 1.0 inch and greater than or equal to 0.5 foot in length (conifers) or greater than or equal to 1.0 foot in length (hardwoods). Site Tree Data describing site index trees

Page 13: FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF …€¦ · 07/11/2011  · FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF COASTAL ALASKA 2009 Forest Inventory and Analysis Program

Annual Inventory 2009 II. SAFETY

5

II. SAFETY Safety is a number one priority within the FIA program. In the field there are many safety hazards. Everyone must always be conscious of these hazards to avoid accidents.

1. Don’t take chances! 2. Eliminate horseplay and carelessness! 3. Think Safety! 4. No task is more important than personal safety! 5. Always make sure that someone else knows where you plan to work each day!

SAFETY IN THE WOODS Wear protective clothing. HARDHATS (mandatory!), long-sleeved shirts, long pants, and gloves may protect you from brush, devils club, cow parsnip, rocks, and stinging insects. Firearm safety. Inspect your firearm every day before heading out into the field. Take the time to keep your assigned firearm well maintained and clean. Only employees certified in firearm safety will be allowed to carry and operate them. Notify all crewmembers on the status of the firearm whenever it is loaded, unloaded, etc. Point the muzzle in a safe direction at all times, remember treat every firearm encountered as if it is loaded and ready to fire. Keep extra ammunition dry and put it in an “easy to access” location. Keep fingers and branches away from the trigger guard and keep the action area as clean as possible. Walk, don’t run in the woods. Take your time and plan your route. Avoid plunging through the brush. The best route of travel may not be the shortest. Routes across brushy irregular terrain with rocks and down logs can be hazardous. Be watchful of twigs and branches, which may cause eye injury. Keep a sufficient distance behind the person ahead of you to avoid being slapped by branches. Safety glasses will reduce the chance of eye injury. Be sure that your general whereabouts are known by others. Radio or cell phone contact may not be possible. Keep communication device batteries “topped” off (satellite, radio, etc.). Wear good quality boots that provide good support and traction. Cork boots are provided for you and are recommended for much of the terrain. When contouring a steep slope, do not lean into the hill. This tends to loosen footing. Erect posture or slightly leaning out gives more secure footing. Carry plenty of water. Don’t expect your partner to carry it for you. Bee Aware. Keep an eye out for yellow jacket and hornet activity. Yellow jackets nest in the ground, often in well decayed logs or in thick moss on trees or in snag cavities. Hornets nest above ground in “paper” nests that are suspended from branches. If allergic to insect stings carry medication to counteract the effects of stings. Let your co-workers know about your allergies and how they can assist in an emergency.

Page 14: FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF …€¦ · 07/11/2011  · FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF COASTAL ALASKA 2009 Forest Inventory and Analysis Program

Annual Inventory 2009 II. SAFETY

6

SAFETY IN AND AROUND THE HELICOPTER Wear Personal Protective Equipment (PPE). Nomex flight suit, Nomex or leather gloves, 8 inch leather boots, eye and ear protection, flight helmet, and no synthetic clothing under flight suit. Approach/Depart helicopter from the downhill side. Also after pilot gives the signal (thumbs up, nod, etc.) approach/depart from the side or front in a crouching position in full view of the pilot. Help the pilot watch for hazards. Hazards such as other aircraft, power lines, birds, deteriorating weather, and fumes should be reported to the pilot. Don’t go beyond cargo racks or skids. Stay away from the rear of the helicopter, regardless of whether the blades are in motion or not. Keep cockpit chatter to a minimum during takeoff and landing. The pilot will be in contact with air traffic control or something similar during this time. He also doesn’t need any distractions while taking off or landing. Tell the pilot if you feel the conditions are unsafe. Any Forest Service passenger has the authority and responsibility to stop any aviation operation when conditions indicate to them further activity would jeopardize safety. Hazardous Materials on the helicopter. Make sure that bear spray devices are put into the approved airtight container in the rear cargo area prior to flight. If, in mid-flight, you remember that you didn’t put the bear spray away properly, let the pilot know so that you can land and put it away correctly. Make sure the firearm is completely downloaded and make sure all ammo is in the rear cargo area in a pack or plastic ammo container. SAFETY ON THE ROAD It all pays the same, so drive with care, with courtesy, regardless of others’ actions, and with common sense. Seat belt use is required in all government owned, leased, and rented vehicles. Drive Defensively! Expect the other person, whether a vehicle operator or a pedestrian to do the worst thing and be prepared. Do not drive when sleepy, taking medications, or when other personal conditions make it unsafe to drive a vehicle. Get someone else to drive or, if alone, stop driving and nap (out of public view). Always drive with your headlights on. This practice increases the visibility of the vehicle. It is particularly important when driving in fog, on dusty roads, traveling in and out of shadows, and any other low light/visibility situations. Do not operate vehicle in unsafe conditions. Check your vehicle frequently to keep it in good mechanical condition. Lights, horn, steering and brakes should be kept in proper adjustment at all times.

Page 15: FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF …€¦ · 07/11/2011  · FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF COASTAL ALASKA 2009 Forest Inventory and Analysis Program

Annual Inventory 2009 II. SAFETY

7

IMPORTANT PHONE NUMBERS Satellite Phone Numbers Boat, Maritime Maid……………………………………………... 8816-3144-4429 FSL Connie Hubbard……………………………………………...8816-3144-2500 FSL AK/HI Coordinator……………………………………………8816-3144-2510 FSL Steve Trimble……………………………………………….. 8816-3145-7457 FSL Misha Yatskov………………………………………………. 8816-3144-2508 FSL Nick Lisuzzo…………………………………………… 8816-4141-5556 FSL Nicole Amato………………………………………………... 8816-3145-7456 FSL Marc Much………………………………………………...... 8816-3145-7458 FSL Will Bunten………………………………………………….. 8816-3144-2509 FSL Jon Williams..................................................................... 8816-4141-5557 FSL Brendt Mueller………………………………………………. 8816-4141-5555 FSL Office (modem)……………………………………………... 8816-3145-7455 FSL Floater/Heli Tracking Phone..…………………………….. 8816-3145-6171 Cell Phone Numbers Boat, Maritime Maid……………………………………………... 907-399-1770 FSL Team Leader: Connie Hubbard……………….……………907-748-2090 FSL Coastal Coordinator (Detail) Brendt Mueller…………… 907-748-1838 FSL Assistant CC: Steve Trimble………………………. 907-748-2099 FSL AK/HI Coordinator (Hiring)….……………….…………… 907-748-2092 FSL QA: Misha Yatskov………………….……………………… 907-748-2095 FSL Crew Leader: Will Bunten…………………………………. 907-748-2096 FSL Crew Leader: Jon Williams………………………………... 907-748-2094 FSL QA: Nick Lisuzzo……………….........................................907-748-1839 FSL QA: Nicole Amato……………………………………………907-748-2089 FSL Crew Leader: Marc Much…………………………………...907-529-6311 FSL Crew Member: Eric Straley……………………………….. 907-748-2097 FSL IRAM: Ray Koleser…………………………………………..907-748-2091 FSL Computer Specialist: Jane Reid………………………….. 907-748-2086 FSL Computer Specialist: Bill Fischer…………………………..907-748-2093 FSL Safety: Chris Teutsch……………………………………… 907-748-2087 FSL FLOATER CELL..………………………………………..….907-748-2085 FSL Cellular One Phone……………………………………….. 907-350-4760 Tongass National Forest Dispatch Offices Ketchikan –(Office)………………………….............................. 907-228-6211 Petersburg – Trina Ives (Office)……………………………….. 907-772-5899 Sitka/Yakutat – Sarah Rose (Office)…………………………….907-747-5611 John Krosse (FAO)………………………………………(Office) 907-228-6345 (Cell) 907-617-3190

Page 16: FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF …€¦ · 07/11/2011  · FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF COASTAL ALASKA 2009 Forest Inventory and Analysis Program

Annual Inventory 2009 II. SAFETY

8

Chugach National Forest Forest Dispatch Office(Campbell Tract)…………………….... 907-267-1277 Cordova – Sue Farzan (Office)............................................ 907-424-4739 Use only for crew check in calls to FDO (I-Phone)…..............907-743-9433 (Sat Phone)…..8816-3144-3574 Jeff Schlee – FAO…………………………………. (Office)… 907-743-9441 (Cell)… 907-738-1224 After hours-24 Hr Duty (Dispatch -Cell)…. 907-351-1216

Regional Office Regional Aviation Officer – Boyce Bingham (Office)………… 907-586-8740 (Cell)… 907-723-7270 Helicopter Operations Specialist - Dave Galloway…..(Office) 907-586-8782 (Cell)... 907-723-1779 Reg. Aviation Maintenance Inspector - Mike Abrams..(Office) 907-586-8770 (Cell)… 907-723-1909 GovTrip Business Hours…………………………………………………... 1-877-372-7248 After Hours(for emergency changes within 24hrs)…………….1-866-569-5334

Maritime Helicopters Office………….………………………………………………...… 907-235-7771 Howard Cell……………………………………………………… 907-299-0173 Bob Fell (Chief Pilot)……………………………………………...907-227-7602

AFSL Office Telephone Numbers Front Desk.- Ed Mobley…………………………………………..907-743-9425 Connie Hubbard…………………………………………………. 907-743-9420 Ray Koleser……………………………………………………… 907-743-9416 Chris Teutsch……………………………………………………. 907-743-9414 GIS desk……………………………………………………. 907-743-9423 Jane Reid………………………………………………………… 907-743-9411 Ken Winterberger……………………………………………….. 907-743-9419 Bill Fischer……………………………………………………….. 907-743-9422 Tara Barrett………………………………………………………. .907-743-9406 Brendt Mueller……………………………………………………..907-743-9408 Steve Trimble………………………………………………………907-743-9417 Hans Andersen…………………………………………………….907-743-9407 Beth Schulz………………………………………………………...907-743-9424 Ray Koleser (24 Hr Emergency Contact)…………………… 907-743-9416 (Cell)… 907-748-2091 (Home)… 907-348-0950 Ken Winterberger (24 hour Alternate Contact)………………..907-743-9419 Personal Cell…..860-287-1566

Page 17: FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF …€¦ · 07/11/2011  · FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF COASTAL ALASKA 2009 Forest Inventory and Analysis Program

Annual Inventory 2009 III. LOCATING THE PLOT

9

III. LOCATING THE PLOT OVERVIEW OF LOCATING THE PLOT ON THE GROUND Establishing the location is the crucial first step in collecting valid field data. While measurements at each location are used to collect statistical information for the entire inventory unit, each location is also compared to satellite information for the same point. Because these sampling layers must measure attributes on the same location, it is critical that the ground sample be located as accurately as possible. Plots with active logging If the plot area is being logged (timber is being felled, bucked, or yarded) or is unsafe to visit because of active logging, DO NOT ESTABLISH THE PLOT ! Note on the plot folder the status of the logging operation and return the plot to the unit coordinator. Proceed to an alternate plot if available. Photo Navigating in Alaska Using a map, ortho photos, aerial photos, and a GPS unit, the first task is to find the ground location of the plot center (PC) delineated on the photos. All ground locations will be located from a reference point (RP) so that the location can be found during future remeasurement. At some locations, the PC can also be located on the ground visually without chaining from an RP. Some areas of Alaska have very poor or limited air photo coverage. Typically crews will have plenty of time to evaluate air photography and plan their approach to plot prior to departing. If your photography looks suspect or you have doubt in your ability to follow the procedures outlined here due to poor photo quality, please get advice from experienced crew leaders and/or the unit coordinator prior to departing. In some extreme cases, travel to plot will be performed with only a GPS using previous or new plot coordinates. Photo-work formatting (or, how to correctly annotate navigation photos) There could be several different types of photos included in the folder taken to plot (b&w or color ortho, pocket cir, or satellite color ortho). The crew leader or designated photo interpreter will determine which photo is best to receive the RP/PC pinpricks. The best photo should include all relevant information needed for future crews to navigate successfully to the RP and PC. Sometimes, in the case of plot re-measurement, the newest photo will not be the best to use. In this situation, it is acceptable to re-use older photos. If using a new photo on a re-measurement plot, make sure to transfer the prior visit RP/PC pinpricks from the old photo. Make sure this can be accomplished with error free certainty. In this situation, transfer the RP data and format it as shown below, (converted to English units) to the new photo. The data written on the reverse of the photo should be in the following format:

Page 18: FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF …€¦ · 07/11/2011  · FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF COASTAL ALASKA 2009 Forest Inventory and Analysis Program

Annual Inventory 2009 III. LOCATING THE PLOT

10

On a photo that has never been marked up (new plot /re-measure) Both the Reference Point (RP) & Plot Center (PC) will be pinpricked and visible on the reverse. Each of these pinpricks should be circled and identified as either a RP or PC. If they are too close to each other to pinprick effectively, then note this below the RP information, which will be in the following written format: RP Species = XXX Diameter = XXX (to the nearest inch) Azimuth = XXX H. Distance = XXX (to the nearest foot) To Subplot = X (1, 2, 3, or 4) Notes: below the RP data explain any special circumstances that would be relevant for crews visiting the plot in the future, such as: distance/azimuth determined by chaining or GPS, a “new RP was established” (re-measure only), features around the RP helpful in re-locating it. On a photo that has been previously marked up (re-measure) Follow the same format as shown above with the following steps to be used for special circumstances: If using the same RP as previous visit, first write the year of the last visit above the previous (metric) RP data. Next, in an area free of marking, write all of the RP data (same format as shown above) in English units with the current visit year written above it. Finally, a brief note as to why the old photo was used instead of the new one. If using a new RP, make sure it is pinpricked and circled/identified. Above the RP data (use the same format as above) write the current year and “New RP”. Above the old (metric) data, write the year of the last visit and “Old RP”.

STEPS TO RE-LOCATE THE PLOT The plot sampling for 2009 is considered a re-measurement; as many of the previously installed periodic locations will be re-visited. However, there were some differences in the sample grid between the cross-over from the periodic and annual plot location grid. These “differences” created a number of unsampled plots that will be visited and installed for the first time. Thus, for the 2009 field season, the following types of plot location and installation methods will be encountered: First time visit to the field sample location (initial installation) Re-visit of the field sample location (previous installation) Follow the appropriate steps outlined below to correctly locate, calculate distance/azimuth, reference, and install the plot.

Page 19: FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF …€¦ · 07/11/2011  · FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF COASTAL ALASKA 2009 Forest Inventory and Analysis Program

Annual Inventory 2009 III. LOCATING THE PLOT

11

A. First time visit to the field sample location Locating the Field Sample Location (Using Ortho Photos or CIR Photos) Normally, the field crew will establish the sample location using ortho photos. On occasion, the ortho photos will not be adequate for establishing the location and a color infrared aerial photo (CIR) will be used instead. The procedures for using either medium are similar but the CIRs require additional steps for scaling and orientation. To accurately establish the field location the crew will need to know: - Photo scale reciprocal to determine ground distances off the photo

- Azimuth to determine directions off the photo

Establishing the Photo Scale Reciprocal (PSR) Ortho Photos: If using the ortho photos, the scale is already available (and is usually printed on the photo). The ortho photos have been printed at a scale of 1:15840 unless noted otherwise. For photos with a given scale, PSR = Scale (ex. For 1:15840, PSR = 15840) Take the PSR determined here and plug it into the equation in Ground Distance on page 12. CIR Photos: If there is not enough detail on the ortho photo then the color infrared (CIR) print can be scaled by using information from the ortho photo or measuring objects on the ground. The PSR’s obtained here will be used in the formula under section 4 below. To obtain photo scale reciprocal (PSR) for the CIR photos using the ortho photo, do the following: Locate two points on the aerial CIR photo that can also be located on the ortho photo and pinprick them on the CIR. The two objects should be at least one centimeter apart. Using a millimeter scale, measure the distance between the points on each of the photos in meters (1mm =0.001m). Use the following formula to obtain the PSR:

15840 DistanceCIR DistanceOrtho=l ReciprocaScale Photo

To obtain PSR for the CIR photos using ground objects, do the following: Locate two points on the aerial photo (CIR) that can also be located on the ground and pinprick them on the CIR. The two objects should be at least 1/2 centimeter apart on the photo. With a 100 foot tape, measure the distance between the objects on the ground to the nearest 1 foot (Ground Distance), and with a millimeter scale (1 mm = 0.001 meters), measure the distance between the objects on the CIR (CIR Distance). Both distances need to be in meters; so the ground measurement will require a conversion from feet to meters. Multiply the ground distance (English) by 0.3048 to convert from feet to meters. Use the following formula to calculate the PSR:

distanceCIRdistanceGround=l ReciprocaScale Photo

Page 20: FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF …€¦ · 07/11/2011  · FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF COASTAL ALASKA 2009 Forest Inventory and Analysis Program

Annual Inventory 2009 III. LOCATING THE PLOT

12

Establishing a Base Line Azimuth Ortho Photos: When using supplied ortho photos, the azimuth for a baseline on the photo can be found on the plot location folder. For locations visited in 1996 and later, the baseline azimuth is magnetic, with declination based on current World Aeronautical Charts (CD-12 & CE-15). If the orientation of the ortho-photo baseline is in question, note that sample location names are always printed so that when the label is properly oriented, the top of the ortho map is “north.” If a baseline arrow/grid is not present, the edges of the image can be used to indicate the given baseline azimuth. CIR Photos: For CIR photos, the base line azimuth, like photo scale, can be obtained by one of two methods: using the ortho photo or measuring between points on the ground. To obtain an azimuth for the CIR photos using the ortho photo, do the following: Visually but accurately transfer the true north baseline from the ortho photo to the CIR photo and then subtract the declination from 360° to get the magnetic azimuth. Record this azimuth on the photo. To obtain an azimuth for the CIR photos using ground measurements, do the following: Select two points within sight of each other that can also be seen on the CIR. Pinprick these points and draw a line between them (a “base line”). On the ground, sight between the two objects and record the magnetic azimuth on the CIR photo. Reference Point (RP) to Plot Center (PC) Measurements Azimuth With the aid of a stereo scope, locate the RP on the CIR and pinprick it on the ortho photo (or use the ortho photo to locate the RP, if possible). Describe the RP on the location record as well as circling and labeling the pinprick on the back of the ortho photo. Draw a line between the RP and the PC that also intersects the baseline (described above). If the RP-PC line does not intersect the baseline, then a third line intersecting the baseline at a 90° angle can be drawn and its azimuth determined by placing the center of a photo protractor at the intersection of the new line and the baseline, turning the protractor so that the proper azimuth on the protractor is lined up with the baseline and then reading the new azimuth. The new line now becomes the baseline. Determine the direction from the RP to the PC by placing the center of the photo protractor at the intersection of the baseline/RP-PC lines. Turn the protractor so that the baseline azimuth on the protractor is lined up with the baseline. Read the RP-PC azimuth off the protractor and record it on the back of the photo. Ground Distance - Measure the photo distance (PD) between the RP and PC using a millimeter scale (record in meters, 1 mm =0.001 m) and plug it into the formula below. - Take the PSR (as determined from the methods in section 1 above) and plug into the formula below. - Calculate the ground distance using the following formula:

Page 21: FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF …€¦ · 07/11/2011  · FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF COASTAL ALASKA 2009 Forest Inventory and Analysis Program

Annual Inventory 2009 III. LOCATING THE PLOT

13

Ground Distance = Photo Distance(meters) x PSR x 3.2808 Here is an example of this formula in action: Photo Distance (i.e. RP to PC on photo) = 5 mm or 0.005 meters Photo Scale Reciprocal = 15840 Thus, 0.005 x 15840 x 3.2808 = 259.839 feet. Round up to the nearest foot NOTE: All of these calculations need to be written out in full on the back of the photo. Collect all other necessary information for the RP and monument accordingly (see next chapter). Using compass and tape, measure out the computed ground distance, correcting for slope, between the RP and PC. Measure from the face of the RP to the PC

B. Re-visit of the field sample location The first step in re-locating a previously installed plot is to find the old RP. From the LZ or vehicle/skiff parking spot use photos, written descriptions, maps/drawings, and/or GPS coordinates to find the old RP. NOTE: If the Plot Center location is found by the crew, remeasurements will be carried out at that location regardless of any error in installation from the previous visit. If the actual plot location is clearly not in the same location as the “+” on the image, make sure to pinprick and label the actual plot location. The use of notes to describe previous installation errors is mandatory! A new RP may be needed as well, so use the best method below to establish one. In all situations where a crew is chaining to PC, whether from an old or new RP. The end of the chain should be marked with flagging and/or a temporary plot pin. This will allow for describing error (horiz. dist and az.) from the end of chain to the PC in the location record notes. Also, if the PC cannot be found in 3 hours or less and the chain ends in the correct location (after photo verification and a decent search of the surrounding area) then a replacement plot (see Replacement Plot on page 15) will need to be established at the end of chain. Reverse RP method In some situations the RP may not be found (or there is no suitable replacement nearby), but the PC is found by the crew. After remeasuring the plot, crews should create a new RP (time permitting) using the following methods:

1. If GPS coverage is very good, locate the new RP (preferably somewhere between the LZ and PC and it should be visible [and thus pinpricked] on the best photo). Now use the navigation function on the GPS receiver to get an azimuth/horizontal distance from the new RP to the collected PC coordinates. Record all the usual RP data on the location record, in the data recorder, and on the RP tags. However, describe in the RP section of the location record the method used to get the az./horiz. dist. from RP to PC. Also, write the method (GPS) used to determine azimuth/distance near the RP data on the back of the photo.

2. If GPS coverage is poor, then pinprick the location of the new RP on the best photos

available (same photos as the PC pinprick). Using the methods in section A (page 11) to

Page 22: FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF …€¦ · 07/11/2011  · FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF COASTAL ALASKA 2009 Forest Inventory and Analysis Program

Annual Inventory 2009 III. LOCATING THE PLOT

14

determine the distance and azimuth from RP to PC. However, do not chain to PC (unless you have adequate time). Record all the usual RP data on the location record, in the data recorder, and on the RP tags. However, describe in the RP section of the location record the method used to get the az./horiz. dist. from RP to PC.

Use the two Keys below as a general guide for dealing with some of the many possible situations that could be encountered by field crews attempting to relocate Reference Points and the Plot Center. There is no real way to cover every possible situation, so professional judgment and common sense should be the rule for any situation not covered. Also, remember to always document with detailed written notes anything that can help in relocating either the Reference Point or the Plot Center. RP Locator Key RP Found RP suitable for reuse

1. Make sure data between RP tags and location record match (in English units) 2. Replace tags not likely to survive another 10 years with new tags (add English units

to old tags if reusing them) 3. Chain to Plot Center (PC) [see PC key below]

RP NOT suitable for reuse Suitable new RP nearby

1. If the distance between the old and new RP is less than 10 feet, then use same data as the old RP (converted to English units, with new dbh and species as needed).Use notes to describe general location from new to old RP (ex. 5 feet at 170 deg).

If the distance between the old and new RP is greater than 10 feet, write all standard RP data (species, diam, etc.) from the new RP to the old in the location record notes (first line of RP location & description). New RP tags will have horizontal distance and azimuth to old RP etched into them (English units). Use of notes in this situation is critical.

2. Chain to PC from old RP [then see PC key below]

Suitable new RP NOT nearby

1. Chain to PC from old RP [then see PC key below] you may need to use the reverse RP method after measuring the plot.

RP NOT Found

Try to find the Plot Center using photos, written descriptions/maps, and/or GPS coordinates (Install a new RP after measuring the plot, maybe use the reverse RP method).

Page 23: FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF …€¦ · 07/11/2011  · FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF COASTAL ALASKA 2009 Forest Inventory and Analysis Program

Annual Inventory 2009 III. LOCATING THE PLOT

15

If the distance to PC from the RP is far (thousands of feet), then you may want to create a new RP and figure out new distance/azimuth to PC (using techniques in section A, pg 11). If this method is chosen by the crew leader, care must be taken to assure that the PC can be found at the end of the chain. Again, it is very important to write down notes describing the procedures used to relocate (or attempts to relocate) Plot Center. Chain to PC from new RP [see PC key below]

PC Locator Key PC Found

Replace PC witness trees as needed (see Witness Trees next chapter) and remeasure plot. If PC was found and the RP is missing or not suitable, then use Reverse RP method shown at the beginning of section B (page 13). If the PC is found, but the end of the chain from RP lies greater than 30 feet from the PC plot pin, then add notes describing the horizontal distance/azimuth from end of chain to PC plot pin.

PC NOT Found

1. Begin a spiral search from the end of chain from RP; extend up to 200 feet in radius (terrain permitting).

2. At the same time, use all photos, drawings/maps, previous data, and/or GPS coordinates to aid in relocating.

3. If the end of chain does not appear to be at the PC photo pinprick, then use photos to find the pinprick location visually on the ground. If the ground location of the pinprick is found then begin a spiral search of that area, extending up to 200 feet in radius.

4. REMEMBER: If the previous plot is found by the field crew (whether it is right on, or 500 ft in error) the plot will be remeasured in the place it was installed. Notes are required with previous error situations; this will aid future crews when relocating PC locations.

5. If no trace of the previous plot can be found after no more than 3 hours using steps 1-3, then treat as lost plot and begin Replacement Plot procedures below.

REPLACEMENT PLOT (LOST PLOT) If no sign of the plot can be found after an extensive search using all the data available, then the plot will be considered lost. Once the crew leader determines that the plot is lost, then a replacement plot will need to be installed. Plot locating and layout should be performed as if installing the plot for the first time. Use the following steps to correctly account for the lost plot, and to create a replacement plot: 1. The downloaded plot file (lost plot) should be activated in the “Plot Menu” using the following

codes:

a) STATE = 02, PLOT NUMBER = xxxxx, and QA STATUS = 1 (where xxxxx is the lost plot number)

b) From the “Plot Menu” screen enter “Plot lvl data” then enter “1 - Plot Attributes”

Page 24: FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF …€¦ · 07/11/2011  · FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF COASTAL ALASKA 2009 Forest Inventory and Analysis Program

Annual Inventory 2009 III. LOCATING THE PLOT

16

2. Enter the following in the “Plot Attributes” screen:

PNW PLOT KIND = 2 (Remeasurement Plot) DATA SOURCE = 1 (Ground Visit) PLOT STATUS = 3 (Nonsampled) PLOT NONSAMPLED REASON = 06 (Lost Plot) AK Condition Class Status 1 = 5 (Nonsampled) ESTIMATED NONSAMPLE LAND COVER TYPE = XXX (see Item 10 in Plot Level Data chapter) PLOT LEVEL NOTES = Plot is Lost, amount of time searching, etc.

The lost (old) plot is then edited and closed. Be sure to include descriptive notes on the location record explaining how and why the plot could not be relocated.

3. Start a new plot file (replacement plot) using the following codes prior to entering the “Plot

Menu”: STATE = 02, PLOT NUMBER = 99999, QA STATUS = 1 NOTE: PLOT NUMBER will remain 99999 until returning to the field office, there an IM team member or a field supervisor will assist in renaming the plot file with the next available number on the Alaska plot number list.

4. The replacement plot is treated as a new (1st time visit) plot overall. However, certain Items in the “Plot Attributes” screen need to be coded with the following:

PNW PLOT KIND = 5 (Replacement Plot) PREVIOUS PLOT NUMBER = XXXXX (where xxxxx is the lost plot number) P2/P3 PLOT TYPE = 0 (P2 Plot) or 1 (P2/P3 Plot)

NOTE: If “P3” is printed on the old “lost plot” folder label, then enter a 1 for this Item. If there is no “P3” on the label, then it is considered a P2 only and 0 should be entered. It is very important that the proper code be selected so that the crew can access all of the appropriate data entry screens (whether they are P2 or P3 screens). Any lost plot needs a detailed write-up in the location record as to why the crew believes they could not find the plot (ex: clearcut, poor imagery, previous crew error, avalanche, etc.). If there was a disturbance what was it.

Page 25: FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF …€¦ · 07/11/2011  · FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF COASTAL ALASKA 2009 Forest Inventory and Analysis Program

Annual Inventory 2009 IV. PLOT LAYOUT AND REFERENCING

17

IV. PLOT LAYOUT AND REFERENCING

PLOT MONUMENTATION 1. The Reference Point (RP) The RP references the plot pin in the ground (typically at the center of subplot 1, a.k.a. PC). It is an object (usually a tree) that is prominent, apt to be present at next visit, and easily located on the ground. Do not reference a subplot other than subplot 1 just because that subplot is closer to the RP. Reference another subplot only when there is a significant obstacle or other obstruction between the RP and Subplot 1, but not between the RP and the other subplot chosen. Selecting the RP: The RP should be distinctive on both the ground and on the new photos. You may reuse the previous RP tree if it is suitable. If the old RP tree is dead, missing, or difficult to identify on the ground or plot photo, select a new RP (but leave the tags on the old RP). If possible, it should be a tree that is not likely to die or be cut before the next inventory. You may select a snag or other object for an RP (i.e., a shrub, large boulder, or other distinctive object etc.). If you utilize such an RP, describe it on the back of the plot photo and in "RP Location & Description" on the location record. Tag the RP: Mark the RP tree with three tags. If using the same RP as last visit, replace any unsuitable old tags with new tags. Nail two tags 6 feet above ground line, one facing the direction you expect future crews to approach the RP (typically from the LZ), the other facing the direction of Plot Center (PC). Nail the third aluminum square tag below stump height, on the side of the tree facing Plot Center (PC). When attaching a tag, drive the nail into the tree only enough to anchor the nail firmly into the wood. If the RP is a building, rock, or other item that cannot/should not be tagged, make a note in the "RP Location Description" (on the location record) and in the AK RP Notes, that it is not tagged and a description.

Page 26: FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF …€¦ · 07/11/2011  · FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF COASTAL ALASKA 2009 Forest Inventory and Analysis Program

Annual Inventory 2009 IV. PLOT LAYOUT AND REFERENCING

18

Pinprick the RP location: For all plots pinprick the ground location of the RP on the new photo. When the plot is being installed for the first time use the RP and PC pinpricks to calculate the correct horizontal distance and azimuth between them (see previous chapter, Locating the Plot). Record RP data: Record the species of the RP, it's d.b.h. to the nearest inch, azimuth FROM RP to plot pin, and horizontal distance measured (to the nearest foot) from the square tag at the base of the RP to the plot pin. Record this on the back of the aerial photo, record under RP Data on the location record, and in the RP information screen in the data recorder. In “Location Description" on the location record, write any information that would aid the next crew in relocating the plot. Describe prominent features present in the plot area that are unlikely to change in the next ten years; detailed examples include: slope, aspect, topographic position, recognizable physiographic features (i.e. streams, rock outcrops, benches), man-made features, and unusual or large trees. If any new roads have been built in the plot area since the date of the new field photos, sketch them on the location record, if it will help the next crew to find the plot. Route to RP: Record a clear and concise narrative for the travel route to the RP in the space provided on the location record. Begin at a permanent starting point. The term “starting point” is somewhat ambiguous. Normally, the starting point is a landing zone (LZ) or arterial or secondary road junction. In some cases (e.g. wilderness access) the starting point may be a trailhead, shoreline, or the end of a local road. Whatever starting point is selected, it should be easily identifiable from the map, aerial photo (if there is photo coverage of the starting point), and on the ground. The narrative for the route to RP shall identify the mode of travel (driving, hiking, helicopter, floatplane, skiff, etc.), route traveled (include road and/or trail designation number), direction of travel (use cardinal directions), and the distance traveled on each segment.

2. Monumenting Plot Center (PC) Before monumenting, see if an exception (below) qualifies first. NOTE: all old PC and subplot center pins (regardless of color or condition) should be replaced with new white fiberglass plot pins and old pins taken back to the field office as garbage. Tie a piece of flagging to the new pin.

An exception: The plot center monument is not placed at the center of subplot 1 (Plot Center) if either of the following situations occur:

a. The center of subplot 1 is too hazardous to visit (examples: subplot center 1 is in the middle of a pond, or the middle of a freeway, or on the side of a cliff)

OR b. Placing the plot center monument at the center of subplot 1 is very apt to irritate a

landowner (example: subplot center 1 is in the middle of someone's front lawn). If the exception applies, witness the center of the lowest-numbered subplot on the standard layout that has an accessible forest land condition class present within its 24.0-foot fixed-radius plot. Specifically, do the following steps:

a. Place white plot pin at the center of this subplot, remove old subplot center pin. b. Witness the new plot pin to two nearby trees; see "Witnessing the Plot Center" on page

19.

Page 27: FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF …€¦ · 07/11/2011  · FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF COASTAL ALASKA 2009 Forest Inventory and Analysis Program

Annual Inventory 2009 IV. PLOT LAYOUT AND REFERENCING

19

c. Reference the new plot pin to an RP; see "The Reference Point (RP)" on page 17. d. If a revisited plot, determine and pinprick the location of the field sample location on the

new photos using photo interpretation. On all plots: use a sharpie to circle the pinprick on the back of the photo and write "PC" (plot center) and the plot number near the circle.

NOTE: If one of these exceptions applies, then the subplot being referenced is not the center of the plot (subplot 1). Notes in the location record are required to inform future crews of this situation and to notify them which subplot is being referenced by the RP.

Standard Monumenting (Exception above does not qualify) Do the following steps:

a. Install a white plot pin at this location on the ground and tie a piece of flagging to it. The pin should be inserted into the ground far enough to leave about 1/3 visible (about 5-7 inches, soil permitting). On remeasurement plots, if the previous PC plot pin is recovered intact, replace it with the new white pin, taking old one back to field office as garbage.

b. Witness the new plot pin to two nearby trees; see "3. Witness Trees" below. c. Make sure the new plot pin is referenced to an RP; see "1. The Reference Point (RP)" on

page 17. d. Circle the pinprick with a sharpie on the back of the photo and write "PC" (plot center)

near the circle. 3. Witness Trees Witnessing the Plot Center (PC) To witness the plot center pin with nearby trees, do the following steps:

a. Select two trees near the plot center monument that form, as closely as possible, a right angle with the white colored plot center pin. For remeasurement plots, remove all old square witness tags, regardless of whether the witness is being replaced or not. All new PC witness tags shall be recorded in English units and the distance will be slope from the bottom nail head to PC pin where it enters the ground. If live trees are not available, use stumps or sound snags.

b. Nail the appropriate square aluminum tag in two locations on each witness tree; one well below stump height (< 0.5 foot above the ground), the other approximately 6 feet from ground level. Both should be on the side facing the plot center pin. When attaching a tag, drive the nail into the tree only enough to anchor the nail firmly into the wood. Slide the tags out as far as possible from the bark surface.

c. If a stump: If the witness is a stump < 4.5 ft tall, nail an aluminum square tag at the base facing subplot center, also attach an additional square tag to the top of the stump. If the stump is not a tally tree, record "stump" in the tree comment. When nailing tags to stumps, pound the nail in flush to the bole. Tags nailed to stumps stay attached longer if the bark is removed prior to nailing the tag in.

d. If another object: If the witness is a shrub, nail or wire an aluminum square tag to the base of the shrub facing subplot center. If possible, nail or wire an additional square tag higher up which faces the direction you expect future crews to approach the subplot. If the witness is another object (rock, etc.), monument and tag as appropriate. In both cases record comments in the “tree notes” section.

e. Avoid using microplot tally saplings as witnesses unless no other trees are available.

Page 28: FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF …€¦ · 07/11/2011  · FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF COASTAL ALASKA 2009 Forest Inventory and Analysis Program

Annual Inventory 2009 IV. PLOT LAYOUT AND REFERENCING

20

Witnessing subplots (non-PC) Select 2 trees near the pin that form, as closely as possible, a right angle with the pin. If trees are not available, use stumps or sound snags. If the witness is not a tree, follow procedures shown in c) below. On subplots established previously, reuse the previous witness trees, or if there are better trees available, use new witness trees. Renew old witness tags (rounds) as needed. It is suggested you scratch the subplot number on the rounds to help aid in identifying the subplot in the future. All subplot witness slope distance measurements are performed from the nail head (or other point written in notes) to the subplot pin where it enters the ground.

a. For all trees: Nail an aluminum round (yellow side out) 6 feet above ground facing PC, and nail an aluminum round tag (yellow side out) below stump height facing subplot center. If the witness is a live tally tree with a diameter 3.0 in. d.b.h. or larger, mark where diameter is measured with an aluminum nail. If it is not a tally tree, then no dbh nail is required (however, the tags are still required). When attaching a round tag, drive the nail into the tree only enough to anchor the nail firmly into the wood.

b. If a stump: If the witness is a stump < 4.5 ft tall, nail an aluminum round at the base facing subplot center, also attach an additional aluminum round tag to the top of the stump. If the stump is not a tally tree, record "stump" in the tree comment. When nailing tags to stumps, pound the nail in flush to the bole. Tags nailed to stumps stay attached longer if the bark is removed prior to nailing the tag in.

c. If another object: If the witness is a shrub, nail or wire an aluminum round tag to the base of the shrub facing subplot center. If possible, nail or wire an additional round higher up which faces the direction you expect future crews to approach the subplot. If the witness is another object, monument and tag as appropriate. In both cases record comments in the subplot notes and on the location record.

Page 29: FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF …€¦ · 07/11/2011  · FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF COASTAL ALASKA 2009 Forest Inventory and Analysis Program

Annual Inventory 2009 IV. PLOT LAYOUT AND REFERENCING

21

LOCATION CHECKLIST: ___ Monumentation (RP, all witnesses) ___ GPS coordinates collected (LZ, RP, PC) ___ Photo work (Pinprick, data on reverse) ___ Plot level data

___ Condition Class

___ Subplot Info (Invasives, mapping, & seedlings) ___ Tree Record (Tree & Sapling) ___ Site Trees (3 site/age per species, per condition)

P3 Checklist

___ Vegetation ___ Lichens ___ DWM ___ Crowns

4. Other Plot Monumentation Notes Locating the microplot The center of each 6.8-foot microplot is located 12 feet from each subplot center at 90 degrees. Mark each microplot with a yellow plot pin at microplot center, and tie a piece of flagging to the pin. The pin should be inserted into the ground far enough to leave about 1/3 visible (about 5-7 inches, soil permitting). This will ensure the best chance at relocating the pin (still in the ground) with future field visits. Plot Location Record The plot location record is to be filled out, in entirety, before turning in for QA/QC review. Many of the items to be documented are best completed while working on the plot in the field. To avoid making mistakes when finalizing the notes away from the plot (back in the field office) make sure the most important details are written down prior to leaving the plot. Most importantly document the travel description from LZ (or skiff/vehicle parking) to the RP, describe any important objects/features near the RP, whether or not the original or a new RP is being used, describe the plot area including: general health, species mix, historical natural/manmade impacts to the condition (regardless of whether it is forest/shrub-forb-herb/or non-forest), sketch out a few important features on the plot diagram map (front) or Location map (back), and finally be sure to go through the checklist prior to leaving the plot (sample below): GPS Coordinates The following locations on the ground will require the collecting of GPS coordinates (stored as waypoints): LZ/TR (landing zone/vehicle-skiff parking) RP (reference point) PC (plot center) or (one of the other subplots if center of plot is not accessible) See GPS INFO on page 37 for the specific items to be entered into the field data recorder. See chapter X. COORDINATES (GPS) on page 130 for setting up and using the Garmin GPS receivers.

Page 30: FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF …€¦ · 07/11/2011  · FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF COASTAL ALASKA 2009 Forest Inventory and Analysis Program

Annual Inventory 2009 IV. PLOT LAYOUT AND REFERENCING

22

MAINTAINING PLOT INTEGRITY Each crew is responsible for preventing unnecessary damage to current or prospective sample trees, saplings, seedlings, and other resources. Because plots will be remeasured in the future, it is desirable to ensure that observed changes are representative of the landscape as a whole and not due to activities of a previous field crew. The following activities are allowed subject to conditions from the landowner / managing agency. For example agencies that manage wilderness areas may request that tree tags not be used because they detract from the “wilderness experience” of recreationists. Always check the plot folder or with your field supervisor for special instructions prior to beginning inventory procedures. The following field procedures are permitted unless stated otherwise. • Nailing tags on reference and witness trees so that the RP and PC can be relocated. • Boring of trees for age and radial growth to determine tree age, site index, stand age, or for other reasons. • Nailing, tagging, and marking trees and saplings to aid in relocating, identifying, and remeasurement. The following practices are specifically prohibited within the entire plot area including all four points. This area is defined as a 150 foot radius circle around the PC: • Collecting natural artifacts such as stem burls (monkey nuts), antlers, cones, bird nests, etc is prohibited. Removal of stem burls creates open wounds on trees that may allow greater opportunity for disease or insect attack. Removal of other items may alter natural ecological patterns. • Building fires is prohibited. Hot prolonged fires can kill soil microorganisms thus sterilizing the soil. Additionally, the amount of down wood on the plot is altered. • Excessive limb removal is discouraged. It is recognized that it is necessary to remove dead limbs from some species such as spruce but remove the absolute minimum. Removal of live limbs is strictly prohibited as it reduces plant vigor and open wounds provide opportunity for insect and disease attack. Limbs should not be removed on witness and reference trees to facilitate observation of tags with the exception of trees located off-plot (>150 feet from PC). • Discarding trash is strictly prohibited. This includes biodegradable items such as apple cores and grape seeds. These items have the potential of sprouting thus changing the species composition of the site. • Boring and scribing of some specific tree species. Tree species with thin bark, such as quaking aspen, birch, and young cottonwoods are particularly vulnerable to disease when open wounds are created. Try to bore trees off the fixed radius plots for these species.

Page 31: FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF …€¦ · 07/11/2011  · FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF COASTAL ALASKA 2009 Forest Inventory and Analysis Program

Annual Inventory 2009 IV. PLOT LAYOUT AND REFERENCING

23

PLOT LAYOUT AND REFERENCING MQO RP selection: Tolerance: No error in selection criteria, 95% of the time RP data items (diam, species, etc.): Tolerance: See RP Info on page 42 Aerial photograph: Tolerance: Previous and current pinpricks in correct spot: +/- 1 mm, 100% of the time Current plot center and RP labeled correctly: no errors, 100% of the time Plot location: Tolerance: Remeasured plot: relocated, 100% of the time New plot: photos 1:12,000 scale or greater: located +/- 10.0 ft, 90% of the time photos smaller than 1:12,000 scale +/- 30.0 ft, 90% of the time Subplot location: Tolerance: Remeasured subplot: +/- 0.5 ft. of previous location, 100% of the time New subplot: +/- 5.0 ft., 90% of the time Subplot witness (tree) selection: Tolerance: No error in selection criteria, 95% of the time Microplot location: Tolerance: Remeasured microplot: +/- 0.1 ft. of previous location, 100% of the time New microplot: +/- 0.1 ft., 90% of the time

Page 32: FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF …€¦ · 07/11/2011  · FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF COASTAL ALASKA 2009 Forest Inventory and Analysis Program

Annual Inventory 2009 V. PLOT LEVEL DATA

24

V. PLOT LEVEL DATA - PLOT ATTRIBUTES - ...........................................................................................................................................25

Item 1--STATE.................................................................................................................................................25 Item 2--PLOT NUMBER ..................................................................................................................................26 Item 3--QA STATUS........................................................................................................................................26 Item 4--PNW PLOT KIND................................................................................................................................27 Item 5--AK Data Source .................................................................................................................................27 Item 6--PLOT STATUS ...................................................................................................................................28 Item 7--AK PLOT NONSAMPLED REASON (Plot Nons Rsn) .....................................................................28 Item 8--SUBPLOTS EXAMINED.....................................................................................................................29 Item 9--AK Condition Class Status 1 (CC1 Status).....................................................................................30 Item 10--AK Estimated Nonsampled Land Cover Type (NonS Land Cvr) ................................................30 Item 11--AK Previous Plot Number (Prev Plt Num) ....................................................................................31 Item 12--AK Start Date ...................................................................................................................................31 Item 13--HORIZONTAL DISTANCE TO IMPROVED ROAD (Road Distance).............................................31 Item 14--WATER ON PLOT (Water Plot).......................................................................................................32 Item 15--CREW TYPE .....................................................................................................................................33 Item 16--PNW Crew Leader (CLead).............................................................................................................33 Item 17--PNW Crew Member 1 - PNW Crew Member 5 (Name1-Name5) ..................................................33 Item 18--PNW Landowner Plot Summary Request (Own Request) ..........................................................33 Item 19--END DATE ........................................................................................................................................34 Item 20--AK Transportation to Plot ..............................................................................................................34 Item 21--PNW Travel Time To Plot................................................................................................................34 Item 22--PNW Measurement Time On Plot ..................................................................................................35 Item 23--PNW Travel Time From Plot ...........................................................................................................35 Item 24--AK P2/P3 Plot Type (P2/P3 Plot) ....................................................................................................35 Item 25--PLOT - LEVEL NOTES ....................................................................................................................36 Item 26--PNW Periodic Plot Number (Old Loc ID).......................................................................................36 Item 27--AK Year of Previous Inventory(Prev Year) ...................................................................................36 Item 28--FIELD GUIDE VERSION (Core Man Ver) .......................................................................................36 Item 29--PNW Data Recorder Program Version #(PDR Version)...............................................................36

- GPS INFO - ...........................................................................................................................................................37

Item 30--AK GPS Location Type (L) .............................................................................................................38 Item 31--AK GPS UNIT TYPE (T) ...................................................................................................................38 Item 32--AK GPS SERIAL NUMBER (ID/Ser#) .............................................................................................38 Item 33--AK GPS DATUM...............................................................................................................................39 Item 34--AK COORDINATE SYSTEM (C) ......................................................................................................39 Item 35--AK GPS LATITUDE DEGREES (Lt) ................................................................................................39 Item 36--AK GPS LATITUDE MINUTES ........................................................................................................39 Item 37--AK GPS LONGITUDE DEGREES (Long) .......................................................................................39 Item 38--AK GPS LONGITUDE MINUTES .....................................................................................................40 Item 39--AK NUMBER OF READINGS (Num)...............................................................................................40 Item 40--AK GPS ERROR (Err) ......................................................................................................................40 Item 41--AK GPS ELEVATION (Elevat).........................................................................................................40 Item 42--AK AZIMUTH TO PLOT CENTER (Azm) ........................................................................................41 Item 43--AK DISTANCE TO PLOT CENTER (Dist) .......................................................................................41 Item 44--AK GPS Notes..................................................................................................................................41

- RP INFO - ..............................................................................................................................................................42

Item 45--AK RP Type (T) ................................................................................................................................42 Item 46--PNW RP Species (Spc) ...................................................................................................................42 Item 47--PNW RP Diameter (Diam) ...............................................................................................................43 Item 48--PNW RP Azimuth(Azm)...................................................................................................................43 Item 49--PNW RP Horizontal Distance (Dist) ...............................................................................................43 Item 50--PNW RP Az/Dist to Subplot # (S) ...................................................................................................43 Item 51--AK RP Notes ....................................................................................................................................44

Page 33: FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF …€¦ · 07/11/2011  · FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF COASTAL ALASKA 2009 Forest Inventory and Analysis Program

Annual Inventory 2009 V. PLOT LEVEL DATA

25

V. PLOT LEVEL DATA All variables listed in this section are collected on plots with at least one accessible forested condition (PLOT STATUS = 1) and all NONFOREST/NONSAMPLED plots (PLOT STATUS = 2 or PLOT STATUS = 3). In general, plot level data apply to the entire plot and they are recorded from the center of subplot 1. A plot is considered nonforest if no part of it is currently located in forest land (CONDITION CLASS STATUS = 1). A plot is nonsampled if the entire plot is not sampled for one of the reasons listed in PLOT NONSAMPLED REASON. If a forest plot has been converted to nonforest or becomes a nonsampled plot, the previous data are reconciled and an attempt is made to visit the plot during the next inventory. If a nonforest plot becomes forest or access is gained to a previously nonsampled plot, a new forest ground plot is installed. All nonforest and nonsampled plots are visited if there is any reasonable chance that they might include some forest land condition class. Trees on previously forest land plots will be reconciled during data processing. There is a distinction between plots that have been clearcut, and plots that have been converted to another land use. A clearcut plot is considered to be forest land until it is actively converted to another land use. Additional information concerning land use classifications is contained in the next section on Condition Class Attributes. NOTE: The first three items in PLOT LEVEL DATA will be entered by the user prior to entering the Plot Menu. There are three “subchapters” (Plot Attributes, GPS Info, and RP Info) in the PLOT LEVEL DATA chapter, and each represents a different option in the PLOT LEVEL DATA menu, which is accessed by selecting “Plot lvl data” from the Plot Menu. Plot Level Data records the plot location and information about the field crew visit and landowner contact. This information aids future crews in plot relocation, sets up date and inventory cycle information in the data recorder, and makes it possible to analyze the relationship of plot data to other mapped data. - PLOT ATTRIBUTES - Item 1--STATE

Record the unique FIPS (Federal Information Processing Standard) code identifying the State where the plot center is located. When collected: All plots Field width: 2 digits Tolerance: No errors MQO: At least 99% of the time Values:

Code State 02 Alaska

Page 34: FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF …€¦ · 07/11/2011  · FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF COASTAL ALASKA 2009 Forest Inventory and Analysis Program

Annual Inventory 2009 V. PLOT LEVEL DATA

26

Item 2--PLOT NUMBER Record the identification number for each plot, unique within each survey unit. If PNW Plot Kind = 5 (replacement plot) then use 99999 as a surrogate number until a new plot number is reassigned back at the field office. See your supervisor before downloading any PNW Plot Kind = 5 plots back at the field office (see Replacement Plot on page 15 for more information) When collected: All plots Field width: 5 digits Tolerance: No errors MQO: At least 99% of the time Values: 1 to 99999

Item 3--QA STATUS

Record the code to indicate the type of plot data being collected. When collected: All plots Field width: 1 digit Tolerance: No errors MQO: At least 99% of the time Values:

File Name Code# Code Visit type

P 1 Standard production plot C 2 Cold check * R 3 Reference plot (off grid) T 4 Training/practice plot (off grid) D 5 Botched plot file (disregard during data processing) B 6 Blind check H 7 Production plot (hot check)

# Electronic data files are automatically named by the data recorder using the PLOT NUMBER and File Name Code (shown in column above). Electronic data files for plots with QA STATUS 2 to 6 are saved as separate files so that the original standard production plot data is preserved and can be used for quality control and statistical analysis. Cold check - an informal inspection done either as part of the training process, or as part of ongoing QC program. The inspector checks completed work after a crew has turned it in. Data errors are corrected (in a separate, updated plot data file). Blind check - a formal inspection done without crew data on hand; a full re-installation of the plot for the purpose of obtaining a measure of data quality. The two data sets are maintained separately. Data errors are NOT corrected. Blind checks are done on production plots only.

Page 35: FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF …€¦ · 07/11/2011  · FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF COASTAL ALASKA 2009 Forest Inventory and Analysis Program

Annual Inventory 2009 V. PLOT LEVEL DATA

27

Hot check - an informal inspection. Usually done as a part of the training process. The inspector is present on the plot with the crew and provides immediate feedback regarding data quality. Data errors are corrected in the plot file as the crew completes its work. * Note to QA and IM: In 2009 tally will create the cold check (2) template from the completed QA blind check (6) file. Previously, the cold check template was a copy of the completed standard production (1 or 7) file. The following are accessible by entering “Plot lvl data” from the Plot Menu.

Item 4--PNW PLOT KIND Record the code that describes the kind of plot being installed. When collected: All plots Field width: 1 digit Tolerance: No errors MQO: At least 99% of the time. Values:

1 Initial plot establishment

New plot – no previous periodic plot installed at this location, and plot is not a revisited plot or replacement plot.

2 Remeasurement

Revisited plot – annual plot of 4-subplots is being established over a periodic plot and the center stake of subplot one is at the same position as for the periodic plot. Crew should complete Alaska remeasurement protocols.

5 Replacement plot

Replacement plot - could not find/lost periodic plot. All attempts to locate the periodic plot have failed. Crew collects all data as if this was a new plot.. Note: replacement plots require a separate plot file for the previous (lost) plot. Replaced plots are assigned PLOT STATUS = 3 (nonsampled), PNW Plot Kind= 2, and the appropriate NONSAMPLED REASON code (06 – Lost plot). The plot number for the replacement plot is assigned by NIMS. Use 99999 for the replacement plot number while in the field until a proper number can be assigned back in the field office. See page 15 for more information about replacement plots.

Item 5--AK Data Source

Record the code that describes the source for the data collected on the plot location. When collected: All Plots Field width:1 digit Tolerance: No errors MQO: At least 99% of the time Values:

Page 36: FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF …€¦ · 07/11/2011  · FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF COASTAL ALASKA 2009 Forest Inventory and Analysis Program

Annual Inventory 2009 V. PLOT LEVEL DATA

28

Code Data Source

Description

1 Ground All data collected from a ground visit by the field crew.

2 Fly-over Location was flown over; information for the location was determined from the air.

3 PI Information for location was determined in the office using photo interpretation.

4 Other-specify

Specify source of data in Plot Level Notes and on the location record

Item 6--PLOT STATUS

Record the code that describes the sampling status of the plot. In cases where a plot is inaccessible, but obviously contains no forest land, record PLOT STATUS = 2. In cases where a plot is access denied or hazardous land use and has the possibility of forest, record PLOT STATUS = 3. When collected: All plots Field width: 1 digit Tolerance: No errors MQO: At least 99% of the time Values: 1 Sampled at least one accessible forest land condition present on plot or

previously had at least one accessible forest land condition on plot 2 Sampled no accessible forest land condition present on plot and no

previously accessible forest land condition on plot = Non Forest 3 Nonsampled

See Chapter VI. CONDITION CLASS starting on page 45, for more information on what qualifies as accessible forest land.

Item 7--AK PLOT NONSAMPLED REASON (Plot Nons Rsn)

For entire plots that cannot be sampled, record one of the following reasons When collected: When PLOT STATUS = 3 Field width: 2 digits Tolerance: No errors MQO: At least 99% of the time Values:

Code Description

01 Outside U.S. boundary - Assign this code to condition classes beyond the U.S. border. Entire plots would only be assigned this code if it is determined that a previously measured plot is currently beyond the U.S. border.

02

Denied access area - Any area within the sampled area of a plot to which access is denied by the legal owner, or to which an owner of the only reasonable route to the plot denies access. There are no minimum area or width requirements for a condition class delineated by denied access. Because a denied access condition can become accessible in the future, it remains in the sample and is re-examined at the next occasion to determine if access is available.

Page 37: FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF …€¦ · 07/11/2011  · FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF COASTAL ALASKA 2009 Forest Inventory and Analysis Program

Annual Inventory 2009 V. PLOT LEVEL DATA

29

03

Hazardous situation - Any area within the sampled area on plot that cannot be accessed because of a hazard or danger, for example cliffs, quarries, strip mines, illegal substance plantations, temporary high water, etc. Although the hazard is not likely to change over time, a hazardous condition remains in the sample and is re-examined at the next occasion to determine if the hazard is still present. There are no minimum size or width requirements for a condition class delineated by a hazardous condition.

05

Lost data - The plot data file was discovered to be corrupt after panel was completed and submitted for processing. This code is assigned to entire plots or full subplots that could not be processed, and is applied at the time of processing after notification to the region. NOTE: This code is for office use only.

06

Lost plot - This code applies to whole plots that cannot be relocated. This situation requires notification of the field supervisor. Whenever this code is assigned, a replacement plot is required. The plot that is lost is assigned PNW Plot Kind= 2 and NONSAMPLED REASON = 6. The replacement plot is assigned PNW Plot Kind = 5.

08

Skipped visit - This code applies to whole plots that are skipped (i.e., the entire plot should be assigned to this condition class). It is used for plots that are not completed prior to the time a panel is finished and submitted for processing. NOTE: This code is for office use only.

09

Dropped intensified plot - This code applies only to regions engaged in intensification. It is used for intensified plots that have been dropped due to a change in grid intensity. NOTE: This code is for office use only. This code is primarily intended for regions engage in sub-paneling for intensification purposes Plot records for dropped subpanels may be generated with the information management system.

10 Other - This code is used whenever a plot or condition class is not sampled due to a reason other than one of the specific reasons already listed. A description of the situation is required in the PLOT LEVEL NOTES.

11 Ocean - Plot falls in ocean water below the mean high tide line. Where rivers or canals enter the ocean, ocean water begins where the river/canal width exceeds ¼ nautical miles.

Item 8--SUBPLOTS EXAMINED

Record the number of subplots examined When collected: When PLOT STATUS = 2 or 3 Field width: 1 digit Tolerance: no errors MQO: At least 90% of the time Values:

Page 38: FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF …€¦ · 07/11/2011  · FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF COASTAL ALASKA 2009 Forest Inventory and Analysis Program

Annual Inventory 2009 V. PLOT LEVEL DATA

30

Code Description 1 Only subplot 1 center condition examined and all other subplots assumed

(inferred) to be the same 4 All four subplots fully described (no assumptions/inferences)

Item 9--AK Condition Class Status 1 (CC1 Status)

Record the CONDITION CLASS STATUS at the center of subplot 1. Record the code that describes the status of the condition. The instructions in Section B and C (in the CONDITION CLASS chapter starting on page 47) apply when delineating condition classes that differ by CONDITION CLASS STATUS. When collected: When PLOT STATUS = 2,3 Field width: 1 digit Tolerance: No errors MQO: At least 99% of the time Values:

Code Description 2 Nonforest land 3 Noncensus water 4 Census water 5 Nonsampled

Definitions for Nonforest, Census, and Noncensus water begin on page 48 in the Condition Class chapter.

Item 10--AK Estimated Nonsampled Land Cover Type (NonS Land Cvr)

Record an estimate of what cover type has plurality over the entire plot area. This variable is only available when PLOT NONSAMPLED REASON = 2,3,or 10. For example: if the plot is nonsampled because of hazardous conditions (entered as 03 in PLOT NONSAMPLED REASON above), but the plot area is stocked with mountain hemlock, then enter 270 for the “estimated nonsampled land cover type”. Note: land cover type includes: Forest (001), Nonforest (002), Noncensus water (003), and Census water(004). When collected: When AK PLOT NONSAMPLE REASON = 2, 3, or 10 Field width: 3 digits Tolerance: No errors in group or type MQO: at least 95% of the time Values:

Code Land Cover Type 001 Forest land (valid only when AK Data Source > 1) 002 Nonforest land 003 Noncensus water 004 Census water Spruce / Fir Group 122 white spruce 125 black spruce Fir / Spruce / Mountain Hemlock Group 264 Pacific silver fir 268 subalpine fir 270 mountain hemlock 271 Alaska-yellow-cedar

Page 39: FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF …€¦ · 07/11/2011  · FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF COASTAL ALASKA 2009 Forest Inventory and Analysis Program

Annual Inventory 2009 V. PLOT LEVEL DATA

31

Lodgepole Pine Group 281 lodgepole pine Hemlock / Sitka Spruce Group 301 western hemlock 304 western redcedar 305 Sitka spruce Elm / Ash / Cottonwood Group 703 cottonwood Aspen / Birch Group 901 aspen 902 paper birch Alder / Maple Group 911 red alder

Item 11--AK Previous Plot Number (Prev Plt Num)

Record the identification number for the plot that is being replaced. When collected: When PNW Plot Kind = 5 Field width: 5 digits Tolerance: No errors MQO: At least 99% of the time Values: 00001 to 99999

Item 12--AK Start Date

Enter the month, day, and year in which the sampling on the location being measured was started. When collected: All plots Field width: 2 - month, 2 - day, and 4 - year Tolerance: no errors MQO: 100% of the time Values: Month:

Month Code Month Code Month Code January 01 May 05 September 09 February 02 June 06 October 10 March 03 July 07 November 11 April 04 August 08 December 12

Day: 1-31 Year: 2009

Item 13--HORIZONTAL DISTANCE TO IMPROVED ROAD (Road Distance)

Record the straight-line distance from plot center (subplot 1) to the nearest improved road. An improved road is a road of any width that is maintained as evidenced by pavement, gravel, grading, ditching, and/or other improvements When collected: All plots with at least one accessible forest land condition class (PLOT STATUS =1) Field width: 1 digit

Page 40: FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF …€¦ · 07/11/2011  · FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF COASTAL ALASKA 2009 Forest Inventory and Analysis Program

Annual Inventory 2009 V. PLOT LEVEL DATA

32

Tolerance: No errors MQO: At least 90% of the time Values:

Code Horizontal Distance 1 100 ft. or less 2 101 to 300 ft. 3 301 to 500 ft. 4 501 to 1000 ft. 5 1001 ft. to 1/2 mile 6 1/2 to 1 mile 7 1 to 3 miles 8 3 to 5 miles 9 Greater than 5 miles

Item 14--WATER ON PLOT (Water Plot)

Record the water source that has the greatest impact on the area within the accessible forest land portion of any of the four subplots. The coding hierarchy is listed in order from large permanent water to temporary water. This variable can be used for recreation, wildlife, hydrology, and timber availability studies. When collected: All plots with at least one accessible forest land condition class (PLOT STATUS = 1) Field width: 1 digit Tolerance: No errors MQO: At least 90% of the time. Values:

Code Water on plot

0 None – no water sources within the accessible forest land condition class

1 Permanent streams or ponds too small to qualify for noncensus water*

2 Permanent water in the form of deep swamps, bogs, marshes without standing trees present and less than 1.0 ac in size or with standing trees

3 Ditch/canal – human made channels used as a means of moving water, such as irrigation or drainage

4 Temporary streams 5 Flood Zones – evidence of flooding when bodies of water exceed their

natural banks 9 Other temporary water – specify in plot notes

*A definition for Noncensus water can be found on page 49.

Page 41: FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF …€¦ · 07/11/2011  · FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF COASTAL ALASKA 2009 Forest Inventory and Analysis Program

Annual Inventory 2009 V. PLOT LEVEL DATA

33

Item 15--CREW TYPE Record the code to specify what type of crew is measuring the plot. When collected: All plots Field width: 1 digit Tolerance: No errors MQO: At least 99% of the time Values:

Code Crew type 1 Standard field crew

2 QA crew (any QA crew member present collecting data, regardless of plot QA Status)

Item 16--PNW Crew Leader (CLead)

Enter first initial and last name of the crew leader assigned to this plot. The crew leader is responsible for correct plot installation and overall quality of the data. When collected: All plots Field width: 12 Tolerance: No errors MQO: At least 99% of the time Values: 1 name of up to 12 characters

Item 17--PNW Crew Member 1 - PNW Crew Member 5 (Name1-Name5)

Enter the first initial and last name of up to five additional crew members taking measurements on the plot with the crew leader. When collected: All plots Field width: 12 Tolerance: No errors MQO: At least 99% of the time Values: up to 12 characters for each additional crew member

Item 18--PNW Landowner Plot Summary Request (Own Request)

1-digit code which indicates if a landowner of the plot area requests a summary of the data collected on their land. Make any special comments relevant to the data request (i.e. landowner does not own all 4 subplots, the owner of subplot 2 wants data, etc.) on the location record. When collected: All plots Field width: 1 digit Tolerance: No errors MQO: At least 99% of the time Values:

Code Landowner data request 0 No data request 1 Plot summary requested 2 Special case request-specify

Page 42: FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF …€¦ · 07/11/2011  · FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF COASTAL ALASKA 2009 Forest Inventory and Analysis Program

Annual Inventory 2009 V. PLOT LEVEL DATA

34

Item 19--END DATE Enter the month, day, and year in which the sampling on the location being measured was completed. NOTE: In most cases the sampling for a location will be completed in one day, in which case the start and end dates will be the same. When collected: All plots Field width: 2 - month, 2 - day, and 4 - year Tolerance: no errors MQO: 100% of the time Values: Month:

Month Code Month Code Month Code January 01 May 05 September 09 February 02 June 06 October 10 March 03 July 07 November 11 April 04 August 08 December 12

Day: 1-31 Year: 2009

Item 20--AK Transportation to Plot Record the code that corresponds with the type of transportation that was used to access the plot. When collected: When AK data source = 1 Field width: 1 digit Tolerance: No errors MQO: At least 99% of the time Values:

Code Transportation type 1 Helicopter 2 Skiff 3 Floatplane 4 Road 5 Other (Specify in Plot notes)

Item 21--PNW Travel Time To Plot

Record the number of clock hours it took for the crew to reach and find the plot. Include all time reaching the plot including time spent driving, flying, getting keys from landowners, stopping for coffee, changing flat tires, hiking, searching for the plot location, etc. Typically, this will include the time driving from last night’s lodging and hiking to the plot. (If multiple days were required to reach the plot, include travel from all days. If additional plots are measured from a single campsite, use travel time from the campsite for the additional plots. If time differs among crew, use the crew leader’s travel time. If the plot was visited on subsequent days also, use only travel time to reach the plot on the initial visit.) Estimate travel time to the nearest half hour.

Page 43: FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF …€¦ · 07/11/2011  · FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF COASTAL ALASKA 2009 Forest Inventory and Analysis Program

Annual Inventory 2009 V. PLOT LEVEL DATA

35

When collected: All Field Visited Plots Field Width: 3 digits (xx.y) Tolerance: 1 hour Values: 00.0 to 99.5

Item 22--PNW Measurement Time On Plot

Record the number of person-hours it took to measure all items on the plot (number of people on plot (number of hours on plot). If multiple days were required, add times for a total. Include all time on plot including breaks (if any), equipment repair, etc., as well as actual measurement time. Estimate measurement time on plot to the nearest half hour. When collected: All Field Visited Plots Field Width: 3 digits (xx.y) Tolerance: 1 hour Values: 00.0 to 99.5

Item 23--PNW Travel Time From Plot

Record the number of clock hours you think it will take to travel back from the plot. Do not include time for anticipated stops or delays. Typically this will be from the plot to the lodging where you are staying. (If multiple days are required to return, use total travel time anticipated. If additional plots have been measured from a single campsite, use only travel time to the campsite for the additional plots.) Estimate travel time to the nearest half hour. When collected: All Field Visited Plots Field Width: 3 digits (xx.y) Tolerance: 1 hour Values: 00.0 to 99.5

Item 24--AK P2/P3 Plot Type (P2/P3 Plot)

This variable will be needed when creating a Replacement plot file for a lost or missing plot (see Replacement Plots page 15). Check the old (lost/missing) plot folder to see if it has “P3” printed on it. If it does, then use code 1 for this variable. If it does not then use 0 for this variable. For all other plot situations this variable will be downloaded. (If the plot cannot be extracted, then manual data entry may also require the appropriate code for this variable). When collected: All plots, downloaded, may enter manually under dire circumstances Field width: 1 Tolerance: No errors MQO: 100% of the time Values:

Code Description 0 P2 Plot Only 1 P2/P3 Co-located (co-install)

Page 44: FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF …€¦ · 07/11/2011  · FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF COASTAL ALASKA 2009 Forest Inventory and Analysis Program

Annual Inventory 2009 V. PLOT LEVEL DATA

36

Item 25--PLOT - LEVEL NOTES Use these fields to record notes pertaining to the entire plot. Accessible by pushing the F4 key while in the Plot Attributes screen.

When collected: All plots Field width: 160 Tolerance: N/A MQO: N/A Values: English language words, phrases, and numbers

Downloaded (↓ Not to be updated ↓) portion of the screen

These Items will be downloaded for your use in locating old plots, or will give information that does not require editing by the field crews.

Item 26--PNW Periodic Plot Number (Old Loc ID)

This item is included as an aid in finding/identifying old reference/witness tags to correctly locate PC. When collected: downloaded, when plot has been previously assigned an old location ID. Field width: 7 (3 alpha + 4 numeric) Tolerance: No errors MQO: At least 99% of the time Values: varies, numbering system based on three letters abbreviating map quad names with a unique 4 digit number. Example: COR0260 = Cordova quad plot 260

Item 27--AK Year of Previous Inventory(Prev Year) If the previous visit year is known, then it will be downloaded and available for reference here. When collected: downloaded only when plot has been previously visited. Field width: 4 Tolerance: no errors MQO: 100% of the time Values: >1994 and <2004

Item 28--FIELD GUIDE VERSION (Core Man Ver) Record the version number of the Forest Inventory and Analysis National Core Field Guide which was used to collect the data on this plot. This will be used to match collected data to the proper version of the field manual When collected: All plots, downloaded Field width: 2 digits (x.y) Tolerance: No errors MQO: 100% of the time. Values: 3.0

Item 29--PNW Data Recorder Program Version #(PDR Version) A 3-digit field identifying the version number of the data recorder program used to collect data on the plot. In the format x.y.z. PNW AK data recorder program version # will start at

Page 45: FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF …€¦ · 07/11/2011  · FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF COASTAL ALASKA 2009 Forest Inventory and Analysis Program

Annual Inventory 2009 V. PLOT LEVEL DATA

37

5.0.0 at the beginning of the field season. If minor modifications to the data recorder program are made in response to changes in field procedures or programming requirements, the z field will be changed to z+1. If more significant changes are made, the y field will be changed to y+1. The first field (x) will be changed only in the event of a major modification to the program. Field manuals are not reprinted during the season, but future printings would include any change(s) made to procedures. Do not change the data recorder generated code. When collected: downloaded, all plots Field width: three digits (x.y.z.) Tolerance: no errors MQO: 100% of the time Values: x.y.z (starting at 5.0.0)

- GPS INFO - Accessible by entering “Plot lvl data” from the Plot Menu. There will be multiple records per plot in the GPS screen. Typically a set of coordinates for 3 types; LZ, RP, and PC will be entered into the data recorder, each requiring separate records or lines of data. GPS COORDINATES Use a global positioning system (GPS) unit to determine the plot coordinates and elevation of all field visited plot locations. GPS UNIT SETTINGS, DATUM, and COORDINATE SYSTEM Consult the GPS unit operating manual or other regional instructions to ensure that the GPS unit internal settings, including Datum and Coordinate system, are correctly configured. Each FIA unit will determine the Datum to be used in that region. Coordinates collected using any appropriate datum can be converted back to a national standard for reporting purposes. See Chapter X. COORDINATES (GPS) starting on page 130 for instructions on setting up and using the field GPS unit. COLLECTING READINGS Collect at least 180 GPS readings at the plot center which will then be averaged by the GPS unit. Each individual reading should have an error of less than 70 feet if possible (the error of all the averaged readings is far less). Soon after arriving at plot center, use the GPS unit to attempt to collect coordinates. If suitable readings (180 readings at error less than or equal to 70 feet) cannot be obtained, try again before leaving the plot center. If it is still not possible to get suitable coordinates from plot center, attempt to obtain them from a location within 200 ft of plot center. Obtain the azimuth and horizontal distance from the "offset" location to plot center. If a PLGR unit is used use the Rng-Calc function in the PLGR to compute the coordinates of the plot center (see PLGR guide, separate document). If another type of GPS unit is used, record the azimuth and horizontal distance in Items 35,36.

Page 46: FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF …€¦ · 07/11/2011  · FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF COASTAL ALASKA 2009 Forest Inventory and Analysis Program

Annual Inventory 2009 V. PLOT LEVEL DATA

38

Coordinates may be collected further than 200 feet away from the plot center if a laser measuring device is used to determine the horizontal distance from the "offset" location to plot center. Again, if a PLGR unit is used, Use the Rng-Calc function in the PLGR to compute the coordinates of the plot center. If another type of GPS unit is used, record the azimuth and horizontal distance in Items 35,36. In all cases try to obtain at least 180 readings before recording the coordinates. Item 30--AK GPS Location Type (L)

Record the location type for the coordinates collected on the ground. When collected: All GPS records Field width: 1 Tolerance: No errors MQO: At least 99% of the time Values:

Code Type Description 1 LZ/TR Landing zone / Truck parking spot (required) 2 RP Reference point (required) 3 PC Plot center (PC) 4 Subplot 2 Use only if PC not possible 5 Subplot 3 Use only if PC not possible 6 Subplot 4 Use only if PC not possible 7 Other Describe in GPS Level Notes/Location Record

Item 31--AK GPS TYPE (T)

Record the kind of GPS unit used to collect coordinates. If suitable coordinates cannot be obtained, record 0. When collected: All field visited plots Field width: 1 digit Tolerance: No errors MQO: At least 99% of the time Values:

Code GPS TYPE 0 GPS coordinates not collected (requires GPS note) 1 Rockwell Precision Lightweight GPS Receiver (PLGR) 2 Other brand capable of field averaging (Garmin Map 76Cx) 3 Other brands capable of producing files that can be post processed 4 Other brands not capable of field averaging or post processing

Item 32--AK GPS SERIAL NUMBER (ID/Ser#)

Record the last six digits of the serial number on the GPS unit used. The six digit serial number is affixed to the front of the GPS, just above the directional keypad. When collected: When GPS TYPE > 0 Field width: 6 digits

Page 47: FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF …€¦ · 07/11/2011  · FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF COASTAL ALASKA 2009 Forest Inventory and Analysis Program

Annual Inventory 2009 V. PLOT LEVEL DATA

39

Tolerance: No errors MQO: At least 99% of the time Values: 000001 to 999999

Item 33--AK GPS DATUM Record the acronym indicating the map datum that the GPS coordinates are collected in (i.e. the map datum selected on the GPS unit to display the coordinates. When collected: When GPS TYPE >0 Field width: 5 characters (cccnn) Tolerance: No Errors MQO: At least 99% of the time Values:

Code Description NAD83 North American Datum of 1983

Item 34--AK COORDINATE SYSTEM (C)

Record a code indicating the type of coordinate system used to obtain readings. When collected: When GPS TYPE > 0 Field width: 1 digit Tolerance: No errors MQO: At least 99% of the time Values:

1 Geographic coordinate system Item 35--AK GPS LATITUDE DEGREES (Lt)

Record the latitude degrees, as obtained from the waypoint saved in the GPS unit When collected: When COORDINATE SYSTEM = 1 Field width: 2 digits Tolerance: +/- 140 feet MQO: At least 99% of the time Values: 51-70

Item 36--AK GPS LATITUDE MINUTES

Record the latitude decimal minutes, as obtained from the waypoint saved in the GPS unit When collected: When COORDINATE SYSTEM = 1 Field width: 5 digits Tolerance: +/- 140 feet MQO: At least 99% of the time Values: 00.000 – 59.999

Item 37--AK GPS LONGITUDE DEGREES (Long)

Record the Longitude degrees, as obtained from the waypoint saved in the GPS unit When collected: When COORDINATE SYSTEM = 1 Field width: 3 digits

Page 48: FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF …€¦ · 07/11/2011  · FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF COASTAL ALASKA 2009 Forest Inventory and Analysis Program

Annual Inventory 2009 V. PLOT LEVEL DATA

40

Tolerance: +/- 140 feet MQO: At least 99% of the time Values: 129 – 165

Item 38--AK GPS LONGITUDE MINUTES

Record the Longitude decimal minutes, as obtained from the waypoint saved in the GPS unit When collected: When COORDINATE SYSTEM = 1 Field width: 5 digits Tolerance: +/- 140 feet MQO: At least 99% of the time Values: 00.000 – 59.999

Item 39--AK NUMBER OF READINGS (Num)

Record a 3-digit code indicating how many readings were averaged by the GPS unit to calculate the plot coordinates. Collect at least 180 readings if possible. The data recorder program requires that the number of averaged readings be entered. The Garmin GPSmap76Cx uses a counter to record the number of readings. The update rate for this unit is approximately one reading each second. From the bottom of the Mark Waypoint screen, scroll to the left and highlight “Avg.” Press enter and the unit will begin to average the points location, this number will be displayed at the bottom as “Measurement Count.” When this number reaches 180, press “enter” again to continue with marking the waypoint. See chapter X. (COORDINATES) for more information. Enter the measurement count into the NUMBER OF READINGS field (in the data recorder program). When collected: When GPS TYPE = 1 or 2 Field width: 3 digits Tolerance: No errors MQO: At least 99% of the time Values: 001 to 999

Item 40--AK GPS ERROR (Err)

Record the error as shown on the GPS unit to the nearest foot. As described in Collecting Readings on page 37, make every effort to collect readings only when the error is less than or equal to 70 feet. However, if after trying several different times during the day, at several different locations, this is not possible, record readings with an error of up to 999 feet. When collected: When GPS TYPE = 1 or 2 Field width: 3 digits Tolerance: No errors MQO: At least 99% of the time Values: 000 to 070 if possible 071 to 999 if an error of less than 70 cannot be obtained

Item 41--AK GPS ELEVATION (Elevat)

Record the elevation above mean sea level of the plot center, in feet, as determined by GPS. When collected: When GPS TYPE = 1, 2 or 4

Page 49: FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF …€¦ · 07/11/2011  · FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF COASTAL ALASKA 2009 Forest Inventory and Analysis Program

Annual Inventory 2009 V. PLOT LEVEL DATA

41

Field width: 5 digits Tolerance: +/- 280 ft MQO: At least 99% of the time Values: -00100 to 20000

CORRECTION FOR "OFFSET" LOCATION

As described in Collecting Readings (pg 37) , coordinates may be collected at a location other than the plot center (an “offset” location). If a PLGR unit is used all offset coordinates will be "corrected" back using the Rng/Calc function. If a GPS unit other than a PLGR is used, then record Items 42 and 43.

Item 42--AK AZIMUTH TO PLOT CENTER (Azm)

Record, in degrees, the azimuth from the location where coordinates were collected to actual plot center. If coordinates are collected at plot center, record 000. When collected: When GPS TYPE = 2, 3 or 4 & GPS location type = 3 Field width: 3 digits Tolerance +/- 3 degrees MQO: At least 99% of the time Values: 000 when coordinates are collected at plot center 001 to 360 when coordinates are not collected at plot center

Item 43--AK DISTANCE TO PLOT CENTER (Dist)

Record the horizontal distance in feet from the location where coordinates were collected to the actual plot center. As described in Collecting Readings (page 37), if a Laser range finder is used to determine DISTANCE TO PLOT CENTER, offset locations may be up to 999 feet from the plot center. If a range finder is not used, the offset location must be within 200 feet. When collected: When GPS TYPE = 2, 3 or 4 & GPS location type = 3 Field width: 3 digits Tolerance: +/- 6 ft MQO: At least 99% of the time Values: 000 when coordinates are collected at plot center. 001 to 200 when a Laser range finder is not used to determine distance 201 to 999 when a Laser range finder is used to determine distance

Item 44--AK GPS Notes

Record any notes needed to clarify or explain a special situation in the particular GPS record being defined. Accessible by pushing the F4 key, can enter a note for each individual GPS record (line). When collected: As needed; required with GPS Location type = 7 or GPS type = 0 Field width: 40 Tolerance: N/A MQO: N/A Values: Words or abbreviated sentences

Page 50: FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF …€¦ · 07/11/2011  · FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF COASTAL ALASKA 2009 Forest Inventory and Analysis Program

Annual Inventory 2009 V. PLOT LEVEL DATA

42

- RP INFO -

Accessible by entering “Plot lvl data” from the Plot Menu. Reference point (RP) data items Record the following items which describe the RP and the course from the RP to the plot as described In the RP section (page 17). These data items should match what is recorded on the paper location record, and are etched into the tags affixed to the RP. Item 45--AK RP Type (T)

Record the type of object chosen as the Reference Point (RP). When collected: All plots with PLOT STATUS = 1, or when in National Forest Wilderness all plots with PLOT STATUS = 1, 2 Field width: 1 digit Tolerance: No errors MQO: At least 99% of the time Values:

Code RP type 1 Tree or stump 2 Rock 3 Shrub 4 Other-specify in RP notes

Item 46--PNW RP Species (Spc)

If the RP is a tree or stump record it's species code. When collected: When AK RP type = 1 Field width: 3 digits Tolerance: No errors MQO: At least 99% of the time

Values: CODE SPECIES CODE SPECIES 011 Pacific silver fir 242 western redcedar 019 subalpine fir 263 western hemlock 042 Alaska yellow-cedar 264 mountain hemlock 071 tamarack (native) (u) 351 red alder 094 white spruce 375 paper birch 095 black spruce 661 Oregon crabapple (u) 098 sitka spruce 746 quaking aspen 108 lodegepole pine 747 black cottonwood 231 Pacific yew (u)

(u) = uncommon

Page 51: FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF …€¦ · 07/11/2011  · FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF COASTAL ALASKA 2009 Forest Inventory and Analysis Program

Annual Inventory 2009 V. PLOT LEVEL DATA

43

Item 47--PNW RP Diameter (Diam) If the RP is a tree or stump, measure (or estimate) and record it's diameter to the nearest inch. When collected: When AK RP type = 1 Field width: 3 digits Tolerance: +/- 10% MQO: At least 90% of the time Value: 001-999

Item 48--PNW RP Azimuth (Azm)

Record, in degrees, the azimuth from the RP to the plot. When collected: All plots with PLOT STATUS = 1, or when in National Forest Wilderness all plots with PLOT STATUS = 1, 2 Field width: 3 digits Tolerance: +/- 4 degrees MQO: At least 95% of the time Value: 001-360

Item 49--PNW RP Horizontal Distance (Dist)

Record, to the nearest foot, the horizontal distance from the face of the RP (basal tag, facing plot center) to Plot Center (PC). When collected: All plots with PLOT STATUS = 1, or when in National Forest Wilderness all plots with PLOT STATUS = 1, 2 Field width: 4 digits Tolerance: +/- 5% MQO: At least 95% of the time Value: 0001-9999

Item 50--PNW RP Az/Dist to Subplot # (S)

Record the 1-digit number of the subplot which is referenced from the RP. Reference to subplot 1 whenever possible. When collected: All plots with PLOT STATUS = 1, or when in National Forest Wilderness all plots with PLOT STATUS = 1, 2 Field width: 1 digit Tolerance: No errors MQO: At least 99% of the time Values: 1 to 4

Page 52: FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF …€¦ · 07/11/2011  · FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF COASTAL ALASKA 2009 Forest Inventory and Analysis Program

Annual Inventory 2009 V. PLOT LEVEL DATA

44

Item 51--AK RP Notes Record notes to explain any special RP situation that may need clarification for future plot visits. (i.e., shrub species, height/size of rock, etc.) Accessible by pushing the F4 key, can enter a note for each individual RP record (line). When collected: When needed to describe a special situation with the plot RP Field width: 40 Tolerance: N/A MQO: N/A Value: Single words or abbreviated sentences

Page 53: FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF …€¦ · 07/11/2011  · FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF COASTAL ALASKA 2009 Forest Inventory and Analysis Program

Annual Inventory 2009 VI. CONDITION CLASS

45

VI. CONDITION CLASS

A. DETERMINATION OF CONDITION CLASS .......................................................................46 B. CONDITION CLASS STATUS DEFINITIONS.....................................................................47 C. CONDITION CLASS ATTRIBUTES ....................................................................................50 D. DELINEATING CONDITION CLASSES DIFFERING IN CONDITION STATUS .................50

Item 1--CONDITION CLASS NUMBER ............................................................................53 Item 2--CONDITION CLASS STATUS (Cond Status) .....................................................54 Item 3--AK CONDITION NONSAMPLED REASON (CC NonS Rsn) ..............................54 Item 4--AK Estimated Nonsample Land Cover Type (CC NonS Lnd Cvr) ...................56

E. DELINEATING CONDITION CLASSES WITHIN ACCESSIBLE FOREST LAND ..............56

Item 5--RESERVED STATUS (Resv Status) ...................................................................60 Item 6--OWNER GROUP (Own Group) ...........................................................................60 Item 7--FOREST TYPE .....................................................................................................60 Item 8--STAND SIZE CLASS (Stand Size) ......................................................................61 Item 9--REGENERATION STATUS (Regen Status)........................................................63 Item 10--TREE DENSITY ..................................................................................................63

F. ANCILLARY (NON-DELINEATING) VARIABLES ..............................................................64

Item 11--OWNER CLASS .................................................................................................64 Item 12--ARTIFICIAL REGENERATION SPECIES (Regen Spc) ....................................65 Item 13--STAND AGE .......................................................................................................66 Item 14--DISTURBANCE 1 (Dstrb 1) ...............................................................................67 Item 15--DISTURBANCE YEAR 1 (Distrb1 Yr)................................................................68 Item 16--DISTURBANCE 2 (Dstrb 2) ...............................................................................68 Item 17--DISTURBANCE YEAR 2 (Dstrb2 Yr).................................................................68 Item 18--DISTURBANCE 3 (Dstrb 3) ...............................................................................68 Item 19--DISTURBANCE YEAR 3 (Dstrb3 Yr).................................................................68 Item 20--TREATMENT 1 ...................................................................................................68 Item 21--TREATMENT YEAR 1 (Trtmnt1 Yr)...................................................................69 Item 22--TREATMENT 2 ...................................................................................................69 Item 23--TREATMENT YEAR 2 (Trtmnt2 Yr)...................................................................69 Item 24--TREATMENT 3 ...................................................................................................69 Item 25--TREATMENT YEAR 3 (Trtmnt3 Yr)...................................................................70 Item 26--PHYSIOGRAPHIC CLASS (Physio Cl) .............................................................70 Item 27--PNW PRESENT NONFOREST LAND USE (NonF Land Use)..........................71 Item 28--CONDITION CLASS NOTES .............................................................................73

Page 54: FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF …€¦ · 07/11/2011  · FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF COASTAL ALASKA 2009 Forest Inventory and Analysis Program

Annual Inventory 2009 VI. CONDITION CLASS

46

VI. CONDITION CLASS The Forest Inventory and Analysis (FIA) plot is a cluster of four subplots in a fixed pattern. Subplots are never reconfigured or moved in order to confine them to a single condition class; a plot may straddle more than one condition class. Every plot samples at least one condition class: the condition class present at plot center (the center of subplot 1) A. DETERMINATION OF CONDITION CLASS Step 1: Delineate the plot area by CONDITION CLASS STATUS The first attribute considered when defining a condition class is CONDITION CLASS STATUS. The area sampled by a plot is assigned to condition classes based upon the following differences in CONDITION CLASS STATUS:

1. Accessible forest land 2. Nonforest land 3. Noncensus water 4. Census water 5. Nonsampled

Accessible forest land defines the population of interest for FIA purposes. This is the area where most of the data collection is conducted. NOTE: One additional attribute, PRESENT NONFOREST LAND USE, is used to define all nonforest condition classes in the sampled area on a plot. See Nonforest Land on page 48 and Item 27--PNW PRESENT NONFOREST LAND USE on page 71 for more information on mapping requirements of Nonforest lands. Step 2: Further subdivide Accessible Forest Land by 6 delineation variables Any condition class sampled as accessible forest land may be further subdivided, in order of listed priority, into smaller condition classes if distinct, contrasting condition classes are present because of variation in any of the following attributes within the sampled area:

1. RESERVED STATUS 2. OWNER GROUP 3. FOREST TYPE 4. STAND SIZE CLASS 5. REGENERATION STATUS 6. TREE DENSITY

No other attribute shall be the basis for recognizing contrasting accessible forest land condition classes. For each condition class recognized, several “ancillary attributes” that help describe the condition will be collected, but these “ancillary attributes” will not be used for delineation purposes.

Page 55: FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF …€¦ · 07/11/2011  · FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF COASTAL ALASKA 2009 Forest Inventory and Analysis Program

Annual Inventory 2009 VI. CONDITION CLASS

47

B. CONDITION CLASS STATUS DEFINITIONS 1. Accessible forest land Land that is within the population of interest, is accessible, is on a subplot that can be occupied at subplot center, can safely be visited, and meets the following criteria:

o The condition is at least 10-percent stocked by trees of any size or has been at least 10 percent stocked in the past. Additionally, the condition is not subject to nonforest use(s) that prevent normal tree regeneration and succession such as regular mowing, intensive grazing, or recreation activities:

To determine stocking levels see “Determination of Stocking Values for Land Use Classification” on page 150 To qualify as forest land, the prospective condition must be at least 1.0 acre in size and 120.0 feet wide measured stem-to-stem from the outer-most edge. Forested strips must be 120.0 feet wide for a continuous length of at least 363.0 feet in order to meet the acre threshold. Forested strips that do not meet these requirements are classified as part of the adjacent nonforest land. Transition zones and forest/nonforest encroachment - When an accessible forest land condition encroaches into a nonforest condition, the border between forest and nonforest is often a gradual change in tree cover or stocking with no clear and abrupt boundary. In addition, it may be difficult to determine exactly where the forested area meets the minimum stocking criteria and where it does not. For these cases, determine where the land clearly meets the 10 percent minimum forest land stocking, and where it clearly is less than required stocking; divide the zone between these points in half, and determine the side of the zone on which the subplot center is located. Classify the condition class of the subplot based on this line.

Example of classifying the condition class of the subplot in a

transition zone with forest/nonforest encroachment. For example, at measurement time 1, a clear and distinct boundary existed between the forest and nonforest condition classes. At time 2, however, there now exists a zone of regeneration or small diameter trees between the previous forest condition and where the nonforest clearly remains. If the zone of encroachment is clearly stocked where it meets the nonforest, classify

Page 56: FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF …€¦ · 07/11/2011  · FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF COASTAL ALASKA 2009 Forest Inventory and Analysis Program

Annual Inventory 2009 VI. CONDITION CLASS

48

the entire zone as forest. If the zone is clearly nonforest up to the original stand, call it all nonforest. If the encroachment or transition zone is not clearly stocked where it meets the nonforest, determine where it is clearly stocked (forest) and where it is clearly not stocked (nonforest); divide this zone in half, and classify the entire subplot based on which side of the line the subplot center falls. Treated strips – Occasionally, crews will come across plantations of trees, in which rows of trees alternate with strips of vegetation that have been bulldozed, mowed, tilled, treated with herbicide, or crushed. Because these strip treatments are conducted to optimize growth or to release the stand, the areas are considered forest land, and the treatment is considered a timber stand improvement operation. Do not confuse these practices with similar treatments on nonforest lands such as yards or rights-of-way. Contact with the landowner may help determine the intent of a treatment. Indistinct boundary due to the condition minimum-width definition: Do not subdivide subplots where a condition class may change due only to the forest vs. nonforest minimum width (120.0 feet) definition. Although the point where the definition changes from forest to nonforest creates an invisible “line” between conditions, this definitional boundary is not distinct and obvious. See the figures below. Where the point of the definition change occurs on the subplot, determine only if the subplot center is on the forest or nonforest side of that approximate boundary, and classify the entire subplot based on the condition of the subplot center. If the boundary crosses through the center of the subplot, classify the subplot as the condition it most resembles. If the boundary occurs between subplots, classify each subplot based on its relation to the definitional boundary.

Forest condition narrows within a nonforest condition. Examine the location of the subplot center in reference to the approximate line where the forest narrows to 120.0 feet wide. In this example the entire subplot is classified as forest.

Nonforest condition narrows within a forest condition. Examine the location of the subplot center in reference to the approximate line where the non forest narrows to 120.0 feet wide. In this example the entire subplot is classified as forest.

2. Nonforest land Nonforest land is any land within the sample that does not meet the definition of accessible forest land or any of the other CONDITION CLASS STATUS values defined in #’s 3, 4 (Noncensus - Census water) below. To qualify, the area must be at least 1.0 acre in size and 120.0 feet wide, with 5 exceptions discussed in section D below. Do not consider evidence of "possible" or future development or conversion. A nonforest land condition will remain in the sample and will be examined at the next occasion to see if it has become forest land.

Page 57: FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF …€¦ · 07/11/2011  · FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF COASTAL ALASKA 2009 Forest Inventory and Analysis Program

Annual Inventory 2009 VI. CONDITION CLASS

49

On all field visited plots with an accessible forest land condition class, map all of the nonforest condition classes present on the 24.0-foot fixed-radius at each established subplot. Do not combine nonforest condition classes present. Example: if nonforest--urban land and nonforest--cropland is both present within a 24.0-foot fixed-radius plot, map each nonforest land use as a separate condition class. On subplots with no accessible forest land condition classes within the 24.0-foot radius, record only the nonforest land use at the subplot center. All Nonforest land condition classes are assigned a present nonforest land use code, see Item 27--PNW PRESENT NONFOREST LAND USE on page 71. Plots that are entirely nonforest fall into one of the following three categories: 1. The plot is field visited on the ground (AK Data source = 1 or 4). PNW PRESENT NONFOREST LAND USE is collected at each subplot center. PC GPS coordinates are collected. A plot file is created in the field data recorder. If in National Forest Wilderness Vegetation Profile is collected 2. The plot is field visited and viewed from a distance (AK Data source = 1, 2, or 4) PNW PRESENT NONFOREST LAND USE is collected for each subplot center. A plot file is created in the field data recorder. 3. The plot is not field visited. (AK Data source = 3 or 4) PNW PRESENT NONFOREST LAND USE is collected for each subplot center. A plot data file is created in the office. 3. Noncensus water Lakes, reservoirs, ponds, and similar bodies of water 1.0 acre to 4.5 acres in size. Rivers, streams, canals, etc., 30.0 ft to 200 ft wide. If a subplot center (including subplot 1) lands in Noncensus water and subplot center cannot be safely occupied and installed, the entire subplot is considered Noncensus water and is classified as a condition class with CONDITION CLASS STATUS = 3 (Noncensus water). No field measurements are made on that subplot. Establish and measure other subplots following normal procedures. If the center of a subplot is accessible, but the subplot has Noncensus water present within its 24.0-foot fixed-radius plot, map the Noncensus water area as a separate condition class. Use normal procedures to map and measure condition classes. 4. Census water Lakes, reservoirs, ponds, and similar bodies of water 4.5 ac in size and larger; and rivers, streams, canals, etc., more than 200 ft wide (1990 U.S. Census definition). If a subplot center (including subplot 1) lands in Census water and subplot center cannot be safely occupied and installed, the entire subplot is considered Census water and is classified as a condition class with CONDITION CLASS STATUS = 4 (Census water). No field measurements are made on that subplot. Establish and measure other subplots following normal procedures.

Page 58: FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF …€¦ · 07/11/2011  · FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF COASTAL ALASKA 2009 Forest Inventory and Analysis Program

Annual Inventory 2009 VI. CONDITION CLASS

50

If the center of a subplot is accessible, but the subplot has Census water present within its 24.0-foot fixed-radius plot, map the Census water area as a separate condition class. Use normal procedures to map and measure condition classes. C. CONDITION CLASS ATTRIBUTES A CONDITION CLASS NUMBER and a classification for CONDITION CLASS STATUS are required for every condition class sampled on a plot. For each condition class classified as accessible forest land, a classification is required for each of the following attributes: RESERVED STATUS OWNER GROUP FOREST TYPE Attributes where a change causes STAND SIZE CLASS a separate condition class REGENERATION STATUS TREE DENSITY OWNER CLASS PRIVATE OWNER INDUSTRIAL STATUS ARTIFICIAL REGENERATION SPECIES STAND AGE Ancillary - changes do not delineate DISTURBANCE (up to 3 coded) a new condition class DISTURBANCE YEAR (1 per disturbance) TREATMENT (up to 3 coded) TREATMENT YEAR (1 per treatment) PHYSIOGRAPHIC CLASS PRESENT NONFOREST LAND USE (use for all nonforest conditions, regardless of past condition). When classifying CONDITION CLASS STATUS, OWNER GROUP, RESERVED STATUS, and PRESENT NONFOREST LAND USE, base the classification on what is present within the area defined by the fixed radius plot (subplot or microplot). All other variables including: FOREST TYPE, STAND SIZE CLASS, REGENERATION STATUS, STAND AGE, TREE DENSITY, DISTURBANCE, TREATMENT, and PHYSIOGRAPHIC CLASS, should be determined over the entire condition, including but not exclusive to what is encountered within the subplot/microplot fixed radius. D. DELINEATING CONDITION CLASSES DIFFERING IN CONDITION STATUS The first step in delineated condition classes is to recognize differences in CONDITION CLASS STATUS. The most common difference is adjacent accessible forest land and nonforest land. Adjacent accessible forest land and nonforest land condition classes are recognized only if each of the two prospective condition classes is at least 1.0 acre in size, and each is at least 120.0 feet in width. These size and width minimums apply to both accessible forest land and nonforest land.

Page 59: FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF …€¦ · 07/11/2011  · FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF COASTAL ALASKA 2009 Forest Inventory and Analysis Program

Annual Inventory 2009 VI. CONDITION CLASS

51

Within an accessible forest land condition class, unimproved roads, rock outcrops, and natural nonforest openings less than 1.0 acre in size and less than 120.0 feet in width are considered forest land and are not delineated and classified as separate nonforest condition class. Within a nonforest land condition class, forested areas or linear strips of trees less than 1.0 acre in size and less than 120.0 feet in width are considered part of the nonforest condition class. Five exceptions to these size and width requirements apply: 1. Developed nonforest condition: human-caused nonforest land condition classes such as homes or cabins that are less than 1.0 acre in size and 120.0 feet in width and are surrounded by forest land. Developed nonforest conditions less than 120 feet wide or less than an acre in size cannot fragment an otherwise forested condition into nonforest pieces. See the following three diagrams used to help in “visually” explaining this rule (aka the “road as stopper rule”):

There are three kinds of developed nonforest inclusions that do not have to meet area or width requirements:

a. Improved roads: paved roads, gravel roads, or improved dirt roads regularly maintained for long-term continuing use. Unimproved traces and roads created for skidding logs are not considered improved roads.

b. Maintained rights-of-way: corridors created for railroads, power lines, gas lines, and

canals that are periodically treated to limit the establishment and growth of trees and shrubs. Areas under power lines are considered maintained right of way even if no evidence of vegetation treatment is currently evident.

Page 60: FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF …€¦ · 07/11/2011  · FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF COASTAL ALASKA 2009 Forest Inventory and Analysis Program

Annual Inventory 2009 VI. CONDITION CLASS

52

c. Developments: structures and the maintained area next to a structure, all less than 1.0 acre in size and surrounded by forest land. Examples of developments are houses or trailers on very small lots, communication installations in a small cleared area within forest land, and barns and sheds.

2. Distinct, alternating strips of forest and nonforest land: this situation occurs when a plot or subplot samples a condition class that is less than 1.0 acre in size and less than 120.0 feet in width. The condition class is one of a series of parallel strips of forest and nonforest land in which none of the strips meet the minimum width requirement. This exception applies only to nonforest conditions that are not listed under #1, e.g., improved roads, maintained rights-of-way, and developments. For many small intermingled strips, determine the total area that the alternating strips occupy, and classify according to the CONDITION CLASS STATUS (forest land or nonforest land) that occupies the greater area. If the area of alternating strips is so large or indistinct as to make a total area determination impractical, then classify the sample as forest land. For two alternating strips of forest and nonforest between two qualifying areas of nonforest land and forest land, see the figure next page. The figure delineates the boundary between the forest and nonforest condition classes for four different examples. The plot center defines the plot condition for all strips covered by the arrow. Any subplot that falls in the alternating strips uses the rule. Any subplot that falls in assigned nonforest / forest is assigned that type. Example of alternating strips of forested and non forested conditions

Nonforest land greater than 120 ft

wide

Forest land greater than 120 ft wide

Strip of Forest less than 120 ft

wide

Strip of Nonforest less than 120 ft wide (and not cultural, not a separate

condition)

PC

PC

PC

NF

NF

F

F

PC

Page 61: FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF …€¦ · 07/11/2011  · FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF COASTAL ALASKA 2009 Forest Inventory and Analysis Program

Annual Inventory 2009 VI. CONDITION CLASS

53

3. The 120.0 foot minimum width for delineation does not apply when a corner angle is 90 degrees or greater.

Illustration of the 90 degree corner rule. The dotted lines do not create nonforest conditions. 4. Linear water features: natural water features that are linear in shape such as streams and rivers. A linear water feature must meet the definition for Census or noncensus water to be nonforest area. Therefore, a linear water feature must be at least 30.0 feet wide and cover at least 1.0 acre. The width of a linear water feature is measured across its channel between points on either side up to which water prevents the establishment and survival of trees. To determine whether a linear water feature qualifies as nonforest, rely on all available information on hand such as aerial photos, topographic maps, past survey land calls, and ocular estimates at the current survey visit. Linear water features that do not meet the definition for Census or noncensus water should be classified as forest land only if bounded by forest land on both shores. Crews are NOT expected to measure the length of a linear water feature to determine if it meets the 1.0 acre requirement; use professional judgment and common sense on any linear water feature. A 30 ft wide stream needs to be 1452 ft long to be an acre in size. 5. Nonsampled conditions within accessible forest land are delineated, regardless of size, as a separate condition.

- CONDITION ATTRIBUTES - Item 1--CONDITION CLASS NUMBER

On a plot, assign and record a number for each condition class. The condition class at plot center (the center of subplot 1) is designated condition class 1. Other condition classes are assigned numbers sequentially at the time each condition class is delineated. In the condition class screen the CONDITION CLASS NUMBER will be shown in a row across the top. Assign the appropriate values in the column below the appropriate CONDITION CLASS NUMBER. The values entered below the CONDITION CLASS NUMBER will be used to define the unique characteristics of each condition class encountered on the plot.

Page 62: FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF …€¦ · 07/11/2011  · FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF COASTAL ALASKA 2009 Forest Inventory and Analysis Program

Annual Inventory 2009 VI. CONDITION CLASS

54

When collected: All condition classes Field width: 1 digit Tolerance: No errors MQO: At least 99% of time Values: 1 to 9

Item 2--CONDITION CLASS STATUS (Cond Status)

Record the code that describes the status of the condition. The instructions in Section B and C (above) apply when delineating condition classes that differ by CONDITION CLASS STATUS. When collected: All condition classes Field width: 1 digit Tolerance: No errors MQO: At least 99% of the time Values:

CODE CONDITION CLASS STATUS 1 Accessible forest land 2 Nonforest land 3 Noncensus water 4 Census water 5 Nonsampled

Item 3--AK CONDITION NONSAMPLED REASON (CC NonS Rsn)

For portions of plots that cannot be sampled (CONDITION CLASS STATUS = 5), record one of the following reasons. When collected: When CONDITION CLASS STATUS = 5 Field width: 2 digits Tolerance: No errors MQO: At least 99% of the time Values:

01 Outside U.S. boundary – Assign this code to condition classes

beyond the U.S. border. 02 Denied access area – Any area within the sampled area of a plot

to which access is denied by the legal owner, or to which an owner of the only reasonable route to the plot denies access. There are no minimum area or width requirements for a condition class delineated by denied access. Because a denied-access condition can become accessible in the future, it remains in the sample and is re-examined at the next occasion to determine if access is available. In some regions denied access plots may be replaced; check with the field supervisor regarding regional protocols for plot replacement.

Page 63: FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF …€¦ · 07/11/2011  · FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF COASTAL ALASKA 2009 Forest Inventory and Analysis Program

Annual Inventory 2009 VI. CONDITION CLASS

55

03 Hazardous situation – Any area within the sampled area on plot that cannot be accessed because of a hazard or danger, for example cliffs, quarries, strip mines, illegal substance plantations, temporary high water, etc. Although the hazard is not likely to change over time, a hazardous condition remains in the sample and is re-examined at the next occasion to determine if the hazard is still present. There are no minimum size or width requirements for a condition class delineated by a hazardous condition.

10 Other – This code is used whenever a plot or condition class is not sampled due to a reason other than one of the specific reasons listed. A field note is required to describe the situation.

11 Ocean - Condition falls in ocean water below the mean high tide line. Where rivers or canals enter the ocean, ocean water begins where the river/canal width exceeds ¼ nautical miles.

Denied access area If a subplot center (including subplot 1) lands in an access denied area, the entire subplot is considered access denied and is classified as a condition class with CONDITION NONSAMPLED REASON = 2 (denied access area). No field measurements are made on that subplot. Establish and measure other subplots following normal procedures. If the center of a subplot is accessible, but the subplot has access denied area present within it's 24.0-foot fixed-radius plot, map the access denied area as a separate condition class, use normal procedures to map and measure condition class changes. Hazardous situation A plot or subplot is hazardous according to the crew's judgment. If a subplot center (including subplot 1) lands in a hazardous area, the entire subplot is considered hazardous and is classified as a condition class with CONDITION NONSAMPLED REASON = 3 (hazardous situation). No field measurements are made on that subplot. Establish and measure other subplots following normal procedures. If the center of a subplot is accessible, but the subplot has hazardous area present within it's 24.0-foot fixed-radius plot, map the hazardous area as a separate condition class, do not estimate, or 'rough in' tree, vegetation, or other data on the hazardous portion, and follow normal field instructions to the extent safely possible to map and measure other condition classes. Ocean If a subplot center (including subplot 1) lands in the ocean (as defined above), the entire subplot is considered ocean area and is classified as a condition class with CONDITION NONSAMPLED REASON = 11 (Ocean). No field measurements are made on that subplot. Establish and measure other subplots following normal procedures. If the center of a subplot is accessible, but the subplot has ocean area present within its 24.0-foot fixed-radius plot, map the ocean area as a separate condition class, use normal procedures to map and measure condition class changes.

Page 64: FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF …€¦ · 07/11/2011  · FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF COASTAL ALASKA 2009 Forest Inventory and Analysis Program

Annual Inventory 2009 VI. CONDITION CLASS

56

Item 4--AK Estimated Nonsample Land Cover Type (CC NonS Lnd Cvr) Record the land cover type that best represents the condition class, as determined from the air, ground, or some format of remote sensing. Use your best judgment in estimating which cover type is present. This estimation should be based on the plurality (majority) of the cover type present for the entire condition area. Note: land cover type includes: Forest (001), Nonforest (002), Noncensus water(003), and Census water(004). When collected: When AK CONDITION NONSAMPLED REASON = 2, 3, or 10 Field width: 3 digits Tolerance: No errors MQO: At least 95% of the time Values:

Code Land Cover Type 001 Forest land (valid only when AK Data Source > 1) 002 Nonforest land 003 Noncensus water 004 Census water Spruce / Fir Group 122 white spruce 125 black spruce Fir / Spruce / Mountain Hemlock Group 264 Pacific silver fir 268 subalpine fir 270 mountain hemlock 271 Alaska-yellow-cedar Lodgepole Pine Group 281 lodgepole pine Hemlock / Sitka Spruce Group 301 western hemlock 304 western redcedar 305 Sitka spruce Elm / Ash / Cottonwood Group 703 cottonwood Aspen / Birch Group 901 aspen 902 paper birch Alder / Maple Group 911 red alder

E. DELINEATING CONDITION CLASSES WITHIN ACCESSIBLE FOREST LAND Accessible forest land is subdivided into condition classes that are based on differences in RESERVED STATUS, OWNER GROUP, FOREST TYPE, STAND SIZE CLASS, REGENERATION STATUS, and TREE DENSITY. Section A applies when delineating contrasting forest condition classes. Specific criteria apply for each of the six attributes and are documented by attribute in Items 5 to 10 (starting on page 60). “Stands” are defined by plurality of stocking for all live trees that are not overtopped. Additionally, each separate forest condition class recognized within accessible forest land must be at least 1.0 acre in size and at least 120.0 feet in width. If prospective contrasting forest land

Page 65: FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF …€¦ · 07/11/2011  · FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF COASTAL ALASKA 2009 Forest Inventory and Analysis Program

Annual Inventory 2009 VI. CONDITION CLASS

57

condition classes do not each meet these minimum size and width requirements, the most similar prospective conditions should be combined until these minimums are attained. No other attribute shall be the basis for recognizing contrasting condition classes within accessible forest land. For each condition class recognized, many “ancillary attributes” that help describe the condition will be collected, but will not be used for delineation purposes (see Items 11-25 starting on page 64). General instructions for delineating condition classes within accessible forest lands: 1. Distinct boundary within a subplot or microplot: Separate condition classes ARE recognized

if, within a subplot, two (or more) distinctly different condition classes are present and delineated by a distinct, abrupt boundary. The boundary is referenced, see Subplot Mapping on page 87.

2. Indistinct boundary within a subplot: Separate condition classes are NOT recognized if the

prospective condition classes abut along an indistinct transition zone, rather than on an abrupt, obvious boundary. Only one condition is recognized, and the subplot is classified entirely as the condition it most resembles.

Example: The four subplots all sample only accessible forest land. Subplots 1, 3, and 4 sample what is clearly a stand of large diameter trees. Subplot 2 falls in the middle of a stand size transition zone. In the zone, the large diameter stand phases into a sapling stand. Subplot 2 must not be divided into two condition classes on the basis of stand size. Instead, it is treated entirely as part of the large diameter condition class or is assigned entirely to a new condition class that is classified as a seedling/sapling stand. The latter occurs only if the crew thinks the entire subplot is more like a stand of seedlings/saplings than a stand of large diameter trees; then the boundary between the large and small diameter stands is assumed to occur between and not on the subplots.

3. A boundary or transition zone between fixed radii plots that sample distinctly different

condition classes: Separate condition classes are recognized and recorded when a valid attribute obviously differs between two fixed radius plots, but a distinct boundary or indistinct transition zone exists outside the sampled (fixed-radius) area of the subplots. In such cases, a boundary, if present, is not referenced.

Example: The northernmost subplot (2) samples entirely accessible forest land. The other three subplots, 1, 3, and 4, fall clearly in a nonforest meadow. Between subplot 1 and 2 is a transition zone; the number of trees present goes from none to what clearly represents at least 10-percent tree stocking. Two condition classes are sampled: accessible forest land sampled on subplot 2, and nonforest land sampled on the other subplots.

4. Riparian forest area: A riparian forest area is defined as a forest area between 30.0 and

120.0 feet wide, and 1.0 acre or more in size, cumulative, but not necessarily present on both sides of and adjacent to a naturally occurring or artificially created body of water or watercourse with continuous or intermittent flow. Riparian forest areas may be associated with but not limited to streams, rivers, lakes, sloughs, seeps, springs, marsh, beaver ponds,

Page 66: FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF …€¦ · 07/11/2011  · FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF COASTAL ALASKA 2009 Forest Inventory and Analysis Program

Annual Inventory 2009 VI. CONDITION CLASS

58

sink holes, cypress domes and ponds, man-made ditches and canals. A riparian forest area must be associated “within forest” and contain at least one distinct and obvious change in a condition class delineation attribute from its adjacent accessible forest land condition class.

Note: When the width of forest adjacent to a stream is between 120.0 feet and 150.0 feet and the width of the riparian forest is at least 30.0 feet wide, the rules for identifying the non-riparian forest (at least 30.0 feet but less than 120.0 feet) need to be modified. The non-riparian forest can be between 30.0 feet and 120.0 feet and mapped as a separate condition as long as it meets the criteria for delineating a separate condition class, otherwise it will be an inclusion in the riparian forest condition class.

A riparian area (i.e. a band of alder trees along a creek within a Sitka spruce condition class) is typically different from the surrounding forest because of forest type. However, a change in any of the 6 condition class delineating variables makes the riparian area a candidate for a riparian area condition class. A riparian condition class only needs to be at least 30.0 feet wide instead of the standard 120.0 feet. It still must be at least 1.0 ac in size, and must be surrounded by forest on at least one side.

An area 30 feet wide needs to be 1452 feet long to be an acre in size. An area 60 feet wide needs to be 726 feet wide, and an area 90 feet wide needs to be 484 feet long.

Page 67: FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF …€¦ · 07/11/2011  · FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF COASTAL ALASKA 2009 Forest Inventory and Analysis Program

Annual Inventory 2009 VI. CONDITION CLASS

59

In a non-forested area, a band of forest type B that is < 120.0 feet wide is NOT considered a riparian area. It is not a separate condition class at all.

If the stream is < 30.0 feet wide, forest type B is a separate condition class (riparian) if the sum of the two widths of the bands falls between 30.0 feet and 120.0 feet wide, and is > 1.0 acre in size.

Forest type B is a separate condition class (riparian) if the band of it is between 30.0 feet and 120.0 feet wide, and is > 1.0 acre in size.

Forest type B is a separate condition class (riparian) if the band of it is between 30.0 feet and 120.0 feet wide, and is > 1.0 acre in size.

Forest type B is a separate condition class (riparian) if the band of it is between 30.0 feet and 120.0 feet wide, and is > 1.0 acre in size.

If the stream is > 30.0 feet wide, forest type B is a separate condition class (riparian) if either of the two widths of the bands falls between 30.0 feet and 120.0 feet wide and is > 1.0 acre in size.

Page 68: FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF …€¦ · 07/11/2011  · FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF COASTAL ALASKA 2009 Forest Inventory and Analysis Program

Annual Inventory 2009 VI. CONDITION CLASS

60

Item 5--RESERVED STATUS (Resv Status) Record the code that identifies the reserved designation for the condition. Reserved land is withdrawn by law(s) prohibiting the management of land for the production of wood products (not merely controlling or prohibiting wood harvesting methods). Such authority is vested in a public agency or department, and supersedes rights of ownership. The prohibition against management for wood products cannot be changed through decision of the land manager (management agency) or through a change in land management personnel, but is permanent in nature.

Such areas include Congressionally designated wilderness areas, National Parks, state parks, or other lands protected by law or deed. The value for this variable should be preloaded (for condition class 1). However, check to be sure the value is correct for the plot. When collected: All accessible forestland condition classes (COND. CLASS STATUS = 1) Field width: 1 digit Tolerance: No errors MQO: At least 99% of the time Values:

Code Reserve Status 0 Not reserved 1 Reserved

Item 6--OWNER GROUP (Own Group)

Record the OWNER GROUP code identifying the ownership (or the managing Agency for public lands) of the land in the condition class. Conditions will be delineated based on changes in OWNER GROUP only; separate conditions due to changes in OWNER GROUP are recognized only where differences can be clearly identified on the ground when visiting the plot. The value for this field should be preloaded (for condition class 1). However, check to be sure the value is correct for the plot. When collected: All accessible forest land condition classes (COND. CLASS STATUS = 1) Field width: 2 digits Tolerance: No errors MQO: At least 99% of the time Values:

Code Owner Group 10 Forest Service 20 Other Federal 30 State and Local Government 40 Private

Item 7--FOREST TYPE

Record the code corresponding to the FOREST TYPE that best describes the species with the plurality of stocking for all live trees in the condition class that are not overtopped. If STAND SIZE CLASS is nonstocked, then FOREST TYPE is determined by the following hierarchy:

Page 69: FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF …€¦ · 07/11/2011  · FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF COASTAL ALASKA 2009 Forest Inventory and Analysis Program

Annual Inventory 2009 VI. CONDITION CLASS

61

For PNW Plot Kind = 2 plots (remeasured plot), record the FOREST TYPE of the condition at the previous inventory. For all other plots: Evaluate any seedlings available to determine the FOREST TYPE. If no seedlings exist, use adjacent stands and your best professional judgment to determine FOREST TYPE.

Remeasurement Note: Previous (periodic) data has been translated to develop a “forest type” from initial measurements. This data will be available on the print outs in the plot folder. Crews should use the previous forest type as an aid, and should not count on it being 100% accurate. Certain past conditions (Krummholz, multiple species, etc.) may not reflect current forest types. If a previous forest type is “000” then there is likely to be several possible conifer species (mixed) in the condition. Also, there should be a note on the print out if a Krummholz condition is present on the plot.

When collected: All accessible forest land condition classes (COND. CLASS STATUS = 1) Field width: 3 digits Tolerance: No errors MQO: at least 95% of the time. No MQO when STAND SIZE CLASS=0 Values:

Code Species Type Spruce / Fir Group 122 white spruce 125 black spruce Fir / Spruce / Mountain Hemlock Group 264 Pacific silver fir 268 subalpine fir 270 mountain hemlock 271 Alaska-yellow-cedar Lodgepole Pine Group 281 lodgepole pine Hemlock / Sitka Spruce Group 301 western hemlock 304 western redcedar 305 Sitka spruce Elm / Ash / Cottonwood Group 703 cottonwood Aspen / Birch Group 901 aspen 902 paper birch Alder / Maple Group 911 red alder

Item 8--STAND SIZE CLASS (Stand Size)

Record the code that best describes the predominant size class of all live trees in the condition class.

If all other mapping variables are the same, there must be a difference of at least 2 class sizes to differentiate between two different conditions.

Page 70: FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF …€¦ · 07/11/2011  · FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF COASTAL ALASKA 2009 Forest Inventory and Analysis Program

Annual Inventory 2009 VI. CONDITION CLASS

62

When collected: All accessible forest land condition classes (COND. CLASS STATUS = 1) Field width: 1 digit Tolerance: No errors MQO: At least 99% of the time Values:

Code Stand Size Class Definition

0 Nonstocked

Meeting the definition of accessible forest land, and the following applies: Less than 10 percent stocked by trees of any size, and not classified as cover trees (see code 6)

1 < 4.9 inches (seedlings, sapling)

At least 10 percent stocking (or 5 percent crown cover if stocking standards are not available) in trees of any size; and at least 2/3 of the crown cover is in trees less than 5.0 inches d.b.h.

2

5.0 - 8.9 in (softwoods) 5.0 - 10.9 in (hardwoods)

At least 10 percent stocking (or 5 percent crown cover if stocking standards are not available) in trees of any size; and at least 1/3 of the crown cover is in trees greater than 5.0 inches d.b.h. and the plurality of the crown cover is in softwoods between 5.0 - 8.9 inches diameter and/or hardwoods between 5.0 - 10.9 inches d.b.h.

3

9.0 - 19.9 in (softwoods) 11.0 - 19.9 in (hardwoods)

At least 10 percent stocking (or 5 percent crown cover if stocking standards are not available) in trees of any size; and at least 1/3 of the crown cover is in trees greater than 5.0 inches d.b.h. and the plurality of the crown cover is in softwoods between 9.0 - 19.9 inches diameter and/or hardwoods between 11.0 - 19.9 inches d.b.h.

4 20.0 - 39.9 inches

At least 10 percent stocking (or 5 percent crown cover if stocking tables are not available) in trees of any size; and at least 1/3 of the crown cover is in trees greater than 5.0 in d.b.h. and the plurality of the crown cover is in trees between 20.0 - 39.9 in d.b.h.

5 40.0 + inches

At least 10 percent stocking (or 5 percent crown cover if stocking standards are not available) in trees of any size; and at least 1/3 of the crown cover is in trees greater than 5.0 inches d.b.h. and the plurality of the crown cover is in trees > 40.0 inches d.b.h.

6

Cover trees (trees not on species list, used for plots classified as nonforest)

Less than 10 percent stocking by trees of any size, and greater than 5 percent crown cover of species that comprise cover trees

The instructions in sections A and D (above) apply when delineating, on accessible forest land, contrasting conditions based on differences in STAND SIZE CLASS.

Page 71: FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF …€¦ · 07/11/2011  · FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF COASTAL ALASKA 2009 Forest Inventory and Analysis Program

Annual Inventory 2009 VI. CONDITION CLASS

63

Within the sampled area on a microplot or subplot recognize only very obvious contrasting stands of different mean diameter with an abrupt boundary. Example: an obvious abrupt boundary exists within the sampled (fixed-radius) area of a subplot and demarcates a stand size class change. Use tree stocking of all live trees that are not overtopped to differentiate between stand-size classes. Use crown cover as the surrogate for stocking to determine STAND SIZE CLASS. View the plot from the top down and examine crown cover. The stand must have at least 5 percent of the crown cover in STAND SIZE CLASSES of 1,2,3,4, and 5 or any combination of these STAND SIZE CLASSES; otherwise the STAND SIZE CLASS is 0. If 2/3 of the crown cover is STAND SIZE CLASS=1, classify the condition as STAND SIZE CLASS=1. If less than 2/3 of the crown cover is STAND SIZE CLASS=1, classify the condition as STAND SIZE CLASS=2, 3, 4, or 5 based on which of these STAND SIZE CLASSES has the most crown cover.,

Item 9--REGENERATION STATUS (Regen Status)

Record the code that best describes the artificial regeneration that occurred in the condition. The instructions in Sections A and C (above)apply when delineating, within accessible forest land, contrasting conditions based on differences in REGENERATION STATUS. For a forest land condition to be delineated and/or classified as artificially regenerated, the condition must show distinct evidence of planting or seeding. If it is difficult to determine whether or not a stand has been planted or seeded, then use code 0. If no distinct boundary exists within the sampled (fixed-radius) area on any subplot, then do not recognize separate conditions. In many regions of the West, trees are not planted in rows, and planted stands do not differ in physical appearance from natural conditions. In these cases, there is no need to differentiate conditions based on stand origin. Plot records or verbal evidence from landowner is acceptable for determining regeneration status. When collected: All accessible forest land condition classes (COND. CLASS STATUS = 1) Field width: 1 digit Tolerance: No errors MQO: At least 99% of the time Values: Code Artificial Regeneration Description

0 Natural Present stand shows no clear evidence of artificial regeneration. Includes unplanted, recently cut lands.

1 Artificial Present stand shows clear evidence of artificial regeneration.

Item 10--TREE DENSITY

Record a code to indicate the relative tree density classification. Base the classification on the number of stems/unit area, basal area, tree cover, or stocking of all live trees in the condition that are not overtopped, compared to any previously defined condition class TREE DENSITY. The instructions in sections A and C (above) apply when delineating, within accessible forest land, contrasting conditions based on differences in TREE DENSITY.

Page 72: FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF …€¦ · 07/11/2011  · FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF COASTAL ALASKA 2009 Forest Inventory and Analysis Program

Annual Inventory 2009 VI. CONDITION CLASS

64

Codes 2 and higher are used ONLY when all other attributes used to delineate separate condition classes are homogenous, i.e. when a change in density is the ONLY difference within what would otherwise be treated as only one forest condition. Otherwise, code 1 for all condition classes. Codes 2 and higher are usually, but not always, used to demarcate areas that differ from an adjacent area due to forest disturbance or treatment, e.g., a partial harvest or heavy but not total tree mortality due to a ground fire. Delineation on density should only be done when the less-dense condition is 50 percent or less as dense as the more dense condition. Do not distinguish between low-stocked stands or stands of sparse and patchy forest. When collected: All accessible forest land condition classes (COND. CLASS STATUS = 1) Field width: 1 digit Tolerance: No errors MQO: At least 99% of the time Values:

Code Tree Density 1 Initial density class 2 Density class 2 - density different than 1 3 Density class 3 - density different than 1 and 2

In order to qualify as a separate condition based on density, there MUST be a distinct, easily observed change in the density of an area's tree cover or basal area. Examples of valid contrasting conditions defined by differences in tree density are: o The eastern half of an otherwise homogeneous, 20 acre stand has many trees killed by a

bark beetle outbreak, OR

o One portion of a stand is partially cut over (with 40 square feet basal area per acre) while the other portion is undisturbed (with 100 square feet basal area per acre).

NOTE: In these examples, RESERVED STATUS, OWNER GROUP, FOREST TYPE, STAND SIZE CLASS, and REGENERATION STATUS are the same.

F. ANCILLARY (NON-DELINEATING) VARIABLES Item 11--OWNER CLASS

Record the OWNER CLASS code that best corresponds to the ownership (or the managing Agency for public lands) of the land in the condition class. Conditions will NOT be delineated based on changes in owner class. If multiple owner classes within an OWNER GROUP occur on a single condition class, record the owner class closest to the plot center. The value for this field should be preloaded (for condition class 1). However, check to be sure the value is correct for the plot.

When collected: All accessible forest land condition classes (COND. CLASS STATUS = 1) Field width: 2 digits Tolerance: No errors

Page 73: FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF …€¦ · 07/11/2011  · FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF COASTAL ALASKA 2009 Forest Inventory and Analysis Program

Annual Inventory 2009 VI. CONDITION CLASS

65

MQO: At least 99% of the time Values:

Owner Classes within Forest Service lands (Owner Group 10): 11 National Forest 12 National Grassland 13 Other Forest Service Owner Classes within Other Federal lands (Owner Group 20) 21 National Park Service 22 Bureau of Land Management 23 Fish and Wildlife Service 24 Departments of Defense/Energy 25 Other Federal Owner Classes within State and Local Government lands (Owner Group 30) 31 State 32 Local (County, Municipality, etc.) 33 Other Non Federal Public Owner Classes within Private lands (Owner Group 40) 41 Corporate (Includes Native Corporations) 42 Non Governmental Conservation / Natural Resources Organization -

examples: Nature Conservancy, National Trust for Private Lands, Pacific Forest Trust, Boy Scouts of America, etc.

43 Unincorporated Partnerships / Associations / Clubs – examples: Hunting Clubs that own, not lease property, recreation associations, 4H, etc.

44 Native American (Indian) within reservation boundaries 45 Individual

Item 12--ARTIFICIAL REGENERATION SPECIES (Regen Spc)

Record the species code of the predominant tree species for which evidence exists of artificial regeneration in the stand. This attribute is ancillary; that is, contrasting condition classes are never delineated based on variation in this attribute. When collected: All accessible forest land condition classes (CONDITION CLASS STATUS = 1) with evidence of artificial regeneration (REGENERATION STATUS = 1) Field width: 3 digits Tolerance: No errors MQO: At least 99% of the time

Values: CODE SPECIES CODE SPECIES 011 Pacific silver fir 242 western redcedar 019 subalpine fir 263 western hemlock 042 Alaska yellow-cedar 264 mountain hemlock 071 tamarack (native) (u) 351 red alder 094 white spruce 375 paper birch 095 black spruce 661 Oregon crabapple (u) 098 sitka spruce 746 quaking aspen 108 lodegepole pine 747 black cottonwood 231 Pacific yew (u)

(u) = uncommon

Page 74: FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF …€¦ · 07/11/2011  · FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF COASTAL ALASKA 2009 Forest Inventory and Analysis Program

Annual Inventory 2009 VI. CONDITION CLASS

66

Item 13--STAND AGE

Record the average total age, to the nearest year, of the trees (plurality of all live trees not overtopped) in the predominant STAND SIZE CLASS of the condition, determined using local procedures. Record 000 for non-stocked stands. An estimate of STAND AGE is required for every forest land condition class defined on a plot. Stand age is usually highly correlated with stand size and should reflect the average age of all trees that are not overtopped. Unlike the procedure for site tree age (TREE AGE AT DIAMETER), estimates of STAND AGE should estimate the time of tree establishment (e.g., not age at the point of diameter measurement). Note: For planted stands, estimate age based on the year the stand was planted (e.g., do not add in the age of the planting stock). This variable is typically calculated using age tree data (collected in the Site Tree chapter). However, forested conditions that do not have available age trees for boring (i.e. seedling/small sapling), also need to be estimated in the field by the crews. Use the following methods for determining STAND AGE based on the availability of acceptable age trees: For typical “tree size” forested conditions use the three age trees selected (see Site Tree chapter) to get an average age for the condition. Make sure to add in the approximate number of years that passed from germination until the tree reached the point of core extraction on the bole (DBH) to determine the total age of the tree. Use the following chart to determine years to add (to breast height age) by respective species. Remember, only use this table for determining STAND AGE, do not apply this method when determining TREE AGE AT DIAMETER in the Site Tree Information chapter.

Species Years to add (351) red alder, (746) quaking aspen, (747) black cottonwood 2 (375) paper birch 5 All other species 8

For seedling/sapling sized forested conditions count the number of whorls or branch nodes to help in getting an estimate. If there is any other available information on the establishment of the trees (i.e. talked to land owner and he/she tells when it was planted, changes visible between certain air photo years) then use that information to help in determining the stand age. If a condition class is nonstocked (accessible forest), assign a STAND AGE of 000. If tree cores are not counted in the field, but are collected for counting later in the office, record 999. Be sure to go back and put the correct tree age in (for each of the site/age trees) and use those ages to develop an “average” STAND AGE for the condition. When collected: All accessible forest land condition classes (COND. CLASS STATUS = 1) Field width: 3 digits Tolerance: +/- 10% MQO: At least 95% of the time Values: 000 to 997, 999

Page 75: FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF …€¦ · 07/11/2011  · FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF COASTAL ALASKA 2009 Forest Inventory and Analysis Program

Annual Inventory 2009 VI. CONDITION CLASS

67

Item 14--DISTURBANCE 1 (Dstrb 1) Record the code corresponding to the presence of the following disturbances. Disturbance can connote positive or negative effects. The area affected by any natural or human-caused disturbance must be at least 1.0 acre in size. Record up to three different disturbances per condition class from most important to least important as best as can be determined. This attribute is ancillary; that is, contrasting conditions are never delineated based on variation in this attribute. For initial or remeasurement plots, the disturbance must be within the last 5 years. The following disturbance codes require "significant threshold" damage, which implies mortality and/or damage to 25 percent of all trees in a stand or 50 percent of an individual species’ count. Additionally, some disturbances affect forests but initially may not affect tree growth or health (e.g., grazing, browsing, flooding, etc.). In these cases, a disturbance should be coded when at least 25 percent of the soil surface or understory vegetation has been affected. Code the general disturbance codes (i.e. 10, 40, …) only if one of the more specific codes (i.e. 11, 41, ..) does not apply. When collected: All accessible forest land condition classes (COND. CLASS STATUS = 1) Field width: 2 digits Tolerance: No errors MQO: At least 99% of the time Values: Code Disturbance Definition 00 None no observable disturbance. 10 Insect damage 11 Insect damage to understory vegetation 12 Insect damage to trees, including seedlings and saplings 20 Disease damage 21 Disease damage to understory vegetation 22 Disease damage to trees, including seedlings and saplings 30 Fire crown or ground fire, prescribed or natural 31 ground fire 32 crown fire 40 animal damage 41 Beaver includes flooding caused by beaver 42 Porcupine 43 deer/ungulate 44 bear 45 rabbit 46 domestic animal

or livestock includes grazing

50 Weather 51 Ice 52 Wind includes hurricane, tornado 53 Flooding weather induced

Page 76: FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF …€¦ · 07/11/2011  · FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF COASTAL ALASKA 2009 Forest Inventory and Analysis Program

Annual Inventory 2009 VI. CONDITION CLASS

68

54 Drought 55 Earth movement /

avalanches

60 Vegetation suppression, competition, vines 70 unknown / unsure

/ other describe in plot notes

80 human caused damage

any significant threshold of human damage, not described in the DISTURBANCE codes listed or in the TREATMENT codes listed. Must include plot level note to describe further.

Item 15--DISTURBANCE YEAR 1 (Distrb1 Yr)

Record the year in which DISTURBANCE 1 occurred. If the disturbance occurs continuously over a period of time, record 9999. When collected: When DISTURBANCE 1 > 00 Field width: 4 digits Tolerance:+/- 1 year for measurement cycles of 5 years +/- 2 years for measurement cycles of > 5 years MQO: At least 99% of the time Values: ≤ 5 years ago from the current measurement year, 9999

Item 16--DISTURBANCE 2 (Dstrb 2)

If a stand has experienced more than one disturbance, record the second disturbance here. See DISTURBANCE 1 for coding instructions.

Item 17--DISTURBANCE YEAR 2 (Dstrb2 Yr)

Record the year in which DISTURBANCE 2 occurred. See DISTURBANCE YEAR 1 for coding instructions.

Item 18--DISTURBANCE 3 (Dstrb 3)

If a stand has experienced more than two disturbances, record the third disturbance here. See DISTURBANCE 1 for coding instructions.

Item 19--DISTURBANCE YEAR 3 (Dstrb3 Yr)

Record the year in which DISTURBANCE 3 occurred. See DISTURBANCE YEAR 1 for coding instructions.

Item 20--TREATMENT 1

Forestry treatments are a form of disturbance. These human disturbances are recorded separately here for ease of coding and analysis. The term treatment further implies that a silvicultural application has been prescribed. This does not include occasional stumps of unknown origin or sparse removals for firewood, Christmas trees, or other miscellaneous purposes. The area affected by any treatment must be at least 1.0 acre in size. Record up to three different treatments per condition class from most important to least important as best as can be determined. This attribute is ancillary; that is, contrasting conditions are never delineated based on variation in this attribute. For initial or remeasurement plots, the treatment must be within the last 5 years.

Page 77: FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF …€¦ · 07/11/2011  · FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF COASTAL ALASKA 2009 Forest Inventory and Analysis Program

Annual Inventory 2009 VI. CONDITION CLASS

69

When collected: All accessible forest land condition classes (COND. CLASS STATUS = 1) Field width: 2 digits Tolerance: No errors MQO: At least 99% of the time Values: Code Treatment Description 00 None No observable treatment. 10 Cutting The removal of one or more trees from a stand. 20 Site

preparation Clearing, slash burning, chopping, disking, bedding, or other practices clearly intended to prepare a site for either natural or artificial regeneration.

30 Artificial regeneration

Following a disturbance or treatment (usually cutting), a new stand where at least 50% of the live trees present resulted from planting or direct seeding.

40 Natural regeneration

Following a disturbance or treatment (usually cutting), a new stand where at least 50% of the live trees present (of any size) were established through the growth of existing trees and/or natural seeding or sprouting.

50 Other silvicultural treatment

The use of fertilizers, herbicides, girdling, pruning or other activities (not already listed above) designed to improve the commercial value of the residual stand, or chaining, which is a practice used on western woodlands to encourage wildlife forage.

Item 21--TREATMENT YEAR 1 (Trtmnt1 Yr)

Record the year in which TREATMENT 1 occurred. When collected: When TREATMENT 1 > 00 Field width: 4 digits Tolerance:+/- 1 year for measurement cycles of 5 years +/- 2 years for measurement cycles of > 5 years MQO: At least 99% of the time Values: ≤ 5 years ago from the current measurement year

Item 22--TREATMENT 2

If a stand has experienced more than one treatment, record the second treatment here. See TREATMENT 1 for coding instructions, code 00 if none.

Item 23--TREATMENT YEAR 2 (Trtmnt2 Yr)

Record the year in which TREATMENT 2 occurred. See TREATMENT YEAR 1 for coding instructions.

Item 24--TREATMENT 3

If a stand has experienced more than two treatments, record the third treatment here. See TREATMENT 1 for coding instructions, code 00 if none.

Page 78: FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF …€¦ · 07/11/2011  · FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF COASTAL ALASKA 2009 Forest Inventory and Analysis Program

Annual Inventory 2009 VI. CONDITION CLASS

70

Item 25--TREATMENT YEAR 3 (Trtmnt3 Yr) Record the year in which TREATMENT 3 occurred. See TREATMENT YEAR 1 for coding instructions.

Item 26--PHYSIOGRAPHIC CLASS (Physio Cl)

Record the code that best describes the PHYSIOGRAPHIC CLASS of the condition within the plot area; land form, topographic position, and soil generally determine physiographic class. When collected: All accessible forest land condition classes (COND. CLASS STATUS = 1) Field width: 2 digits Tolerance: No errors MQO: At least 80% of the time Values: Xeric -- Sites that are normally low or deficient in moisture available to support vigorous tree growth. These areas may receive adequate precipitation, but experience a rapid loss of available moisture due to runoff, percolation, evaporation, etc.

Code Physiographic class

Description

11 Dry Tops Ridge tops with thin rock outcrops and considerable exposure to sun and wind.

12 Dry Slopes

Slopes with thin rock outcrops and considerable exposure to sun and wind. Includes most mountain/steep slopes with a southern or western exposure.

13 Deep Sands

Sites with a deep, sandy surface subject to rapid loss of moisture following precipitation. Typical examples include sand hills, sites along the beach and shores of lakes and streams.

19 Other Xeric All dry physiographic sites not described above. Describe in condition class notes and on the location record

Mesic -- Sites that have moderate but adequate moisture available to support vigorous tree growth except for periods of extended drought. These sites may be subjected to occasional flooding during periods of heavy or extended precipitation.

Code Physiographic class

Description

21 Flatwoods Flat or fairly level sites outside flood plains. Excludes deep sands and wet, swampy sites.

22 Rolling Uplands Hills and gently rolling, undulating terrain and associated small streams. Excludes deep sands, all hydric sites, and streams with associated floodplains.

Page 79: FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF …€¦ · 07/11/2011  · FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF COASTAL ALASKA 2009 Forest Inventory and Analysis Program

Annual Inventory 2009 VI. CONDITION CLASS

71

23 Moist Slopes and Coves

Moist slopes and coves with relatively deep, fertile soils. Often these sites have a northern or eastern exposure and are partially shielded from wind and sun. Includes moist mountain tops and saddles.

24 Narrow Floodplains/ Bottomlands

Flood plains and bottomlands less than 1/4-mile in width along rivers and streams. These sites are normally well drained but are subjected to occasional flooding during periods of heavy or extended precipitation. Includes associated levees, benches, and terraces within a 1/4 mile limit. Excludes swamps, sloughs, and bogs

25 Broad Floodplains/ Bottomlands

Flood plains and bottomlands 1/4 mile or wider in width along rivers and streams. These sites are normally well drained but are subjected to occasional flooding during periods of heavy or extended precipitation. Includes associated levees, benches, and terraces. Excludes swamps, sloughs, and bogs with year-round water problems.

29 Other Mesic All moderately moist physiographic sites not described above. Describe in condition class notes and on the location record.

Hydric -- Sites that generally have a year-round abundance or over-abundance of moisture. Hydric sites are very wet sites where excess water seriously limits both growth and species occurrence.

Code Physiographic class

Description

31 Swamps/Bogs

Low, wet, flat forested areas usually quite extensive that are flooded for long periods of time except during periods of extreme drought. Excludes cypress ponds and small drains.

32 Small Drains

Narrow, stream-like, wet strands of forestland often without a well-defined stream channel. These areas are poorly drained or flooded throughout most of the year and drain the adjacent higher ground.

33 Bays and wet pocosins

Low, wet, boggy sites characterized by peaty or organic soils. May be somewhat dry during periods of extended drought. Examples include sites in the Lake States with lowland swamp conifers or the Carolina bays in the southeast US.

34 Beaver ponds 35 Cypress ponds

39 Other hydric All other hydric physiographic sites. Describe in condition class notes and on the location record.

Item 27--PNW PRESENT NONFOREST LAND USE (NonF Land Use)

Record the Present Nonforest Land Use for all nonforest conditions (CONDITION CLASS STATUS = 2), regardless of past condition. Use the codes and classifications listed below.

Page 80: FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF …€¦ · 07/11/2011  · FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF COASTAL ALASKA 2009 Forest Inventory and Analysis Program

Annual Inventory 2009 VI. CONDITION CLASS

72

On all visited plots with an accessible forest land condition class, map nonforest land condition classes present on the 24.0-foot fixed-radius at each subplot. If a subplot has an accessible forest land condition class present within the 24.0 foot radius, map each nonforest land condition class present. Do not combine nonforest condition classes. Example: if nonforest-urban land and nonforest-cropland are both present within a 24.0-foot fixed-radius plot, map each land class as a separate condition class. If there are no accessible forest land condition classes present within a subplots 24.0-foot radius, record only the nonforest condition class present at the subplot center. Do not separate nonforest condition classes. Example: if nonforest-urban land and nonforest-cropland are both present within a 24.0-foot fixed-radius plot, record only the condition class which occupies the subplot center. An exception, always delineate any Census/Noncensus water and/or Nonsampled. See Nonforest land on page 48 for information on plots that are entirely nonforest. When collected: Record the PRESENT NONFOREST LAND USE for all nonforest conditions (COND. CLASS STATUS = 2), regardless of past condition. Field width: 2 digits Tolerance: No errors MQO: At least 99% of the time Values: Code Present nonforest

land use Definition

10 Agricultural land

Land managed for crops, pasture, or other agricultural use; the area must be at least 1.0 acre in size and 120.0 feet wide. Use code 10 only for cases not better described by one of the following

11 Cropland i.e. mint, wheat, rye, planted berry fields

12 Pasture Improved through cultural practices such as grading and mowing

13 Idle farmland 14 Orchard

15 Christmas tree plantation

20 Grass/forb/shrub land

Land primarily composed of grasses, forbs, or shrubs (not wetlands). This includes lands vegetated naturally or artificially to provide a plant cover managed like native vegetation and does not meet the definition of pasture. The area must be at least 1.0 acre in size and 120.0 feet Wide

30 Developed Land used primarily by humans for purposes other than forestry or agriculture. Use the code 30 only for land not better described by one of the following:

31 Cultural or Urban Business, residential, and other places of intense human activity

32 Rights-of-way Improved roads, railway, power lines, maintained

Page 81: FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF …€¦ · 07/11/2011  · FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF COASTAL ALASKA 2009 Forest Inventory and Analysis Program

Annual Inventory 2009 VI. CONDITION CLASS

73

canal 33 Recreation Parks, skiing, golf courses

40 Other

Land parcels greater than 1.0 acre in size and greater than 120.0 feet wide that do not fall into one of the uses described above or below. Examples include: noncensus water, recent burns, etc.

41 Naturally nonvegetated Barren rock, sand, lava, glaciers (ice), undeveloped beaches, glacial outwash

42 Vegetated wetlands

vegetated lands where at some period in the year, the water table is usually at or near the surface, or the land is covered by shallow water. Includes: swamps, peatlands (bogs, fens, muskegs), marshes, and tidal flats

Item 28--CONDITION CLASS NOTES

Record any notes needed to clarify or explain a special situation in the particular Condition Class being defined. Accessible by pushing the F4 key, you can enter a note for each defined Condition Class record (column). When collected: All plots, use when clarification is needed Field width: 80 Tolerance: N/A MQO: N/A Values: Single words and abbreviated sentences

Page 82: FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF …€¦ · 07/11/2011  · FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF COASTAL ALASKA 2009 Forest Inventory and Analysis Program

Annual Inventory 2009 VII. SUBPLOT INFORMATION

74

VII. SUBPLOT INFORMATION

-SUBPLOT ATTRIBUTES-......................................................................................................75 Item 1--SUBPLOT NUMBER ............................................................................................76 Item 2--SUBPLOT PLOT STATUS (Sbplt Status)...........................................................76 Item 3--AK SUBPLOT NONSAMPLED REASON (NonS Reason) .................................76 Item 4--AK Estimated Nonsample Land Cover Type (NonS Land Cvr) .......................77 Item 5--SUBPLOT CENTER CONDITION ........................................................................78 Item 6--MICROPLOT CENTER CONDITION (Microplot Cond) ......................................78 Item 7--SUBPLOT SLOPE (Slope)...................................................................................78 Item 8--SUBPLOT ASPECT (Aspect) ..............................................................................79 Item 9--SNOW/WATER DEPTH (Snow/Water Dept) .......................................................79 Item 10--AK Vegetation Community Description for Label ..........................................80 Item 11--SUBPLOT NOTES..............................................................................................80

- INVASIVE PLANT SPECIES - ...............................................................................................81

Item 1--AK Subplot Number ............................................................................................81 Item 2--AK Species (NRCS Code) ...................................................................................82 Item 3--AK Percent Cover................................................................................................83 Item 4--AK Unique Species Number...............................................................................84 Item 5--AK Specimen Officially Collected......................................................................84 Item 6--AK Specimen Label Number ..............................................................................84 Item 7--AK Specimen Not Officially Collected Reason Code .......................................84 Item 8--AK Invasive Plant Notes .....................................................................................85

- SUBPLOT MAPPING - ..........................................................................................................87

Item 1--SUBPLOT NUMBER ............................................................................................88 Item 2--PLOT TYPE (P) ....................................................................................................88 Item 3--CONTRASTING CONDITION (C).........................................................................89 Item 4--LEFT AZIMUTH (LAzm).......................................................................................89 Item 5--RIGHT AZIMUTH (RAzm) ....................................................................................89 Item 6--CORNER AZIMUTH (CAzm) ................................................................................89 Item 7--CORNER DISTANCE (Cdist) ...............................................................................90 Item 8--BOUNDARY NOTES ............................................................................................91

- SEEDLING DATA -................................................................................................................92

Item 1--SUBPLOT NUMBER ............................................................................................92 Item 2--SPECIES ..............................................................................................................92 Item 3--CONDITION CLASS NUMBER ............................................................................93 Item 4--SEEDLING COUNT ..............................................................................................93 Item 5--SEEDLING NOTES ..............................................................................................93

Page 83: FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF …€¦ · 07/11/2011  · FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF COASTAL ALASKA 2009 Forest Inventory and Analysis Program

Annual Inventory 2009 VII. SUBPLOT INFORMATION

75

VII. SUBPLOT INFORMATION Each subplot is described by a series of area parameters relating to topographic features and existing cover type. These data also relate to the microplot, since the microplot is contained within the subplot perimeter.

-SUBPLOT ATTRIBUTES- Accessible by entering “Subpl info” from the Plot Menu Clarification for coding subplots Examples for field coding of subplot plot status, nonsampled reason, estimated nonsample land cover type, center condition, and condition status coding follow. The main thing to keep in mind is that a subplot can be considered “sampled” even if the subplot center cannot be safely occupied: 1. Unable to safely occupy subplot center because of census or noncensus water and there is some forest on the subplot: * forest/water boundary is ignored because crew cannot occupy subplot center. subplot status = 2 (sampled, no accessible forest condition present on point) subplot center condition = n (arbitrary condition class number) condition status of condition = 3 for noncensus water or = 4 for census water 2. Unable to safely occupy subplot center because of hazard (e.g. over edge of cliff) and there is some forest on the subplot: * hazardous/accessible boundary ignored because crew cannot occupy subplot center. subplot status = 3 (nonsampled) subplot nonsampled reason = 3 (hazardous) estimated nonsample land cover type = nnn (designated cover type from list of values) subplot center condition = n (arbitrary condition class number) condition status of condition n = 5 (nonsampled) condition nonsampled reason = 3 (hazardous) condition nonsample land cover type = nnn (designated cover type from list of values) 3. Able to safely occupy subplot center even though the center is in census or noncensus water and there is some forest on the subplot: * forest/water boundary is installed and forested portion of plot is measured because crew can occupy subplot center. subplot status = 1 (sampled, forest condition present on point) subplot center condition = n (arbitrary condition class number) condition status of condition = 3 for noncensus water or = 4 for census water

Page 84: FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF …€¦ · 07/11/2011  · FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF COASTAL ALASKA 2009 Forest Inventory and Analysis Program

Annual Inventory 2009 VII. SUBPLOT INFORMATION

76

Item 1--SUBPLOT NUMBER Record the code corresponding to the number of the subplot. This code will be pre-determined from the Plot Menu of the tally program by selecting “chOOse subplot” and entering the appropriate subplot number (values shown in the table below). When in the “Subplot Info” screen the subplot number will be shown above the data entry column, verify that this is the correct subplot before entering data. The Subplot number chosen using these directions prior to entering data for Subplot Attributes, Invasive Species, Subplot Mapping, and Seedling Data, will be the subplot assigned to the respective data.

When Collected: All subplots Field width: 1 digit Tolerance: No errors MQO: At least 99% of the time Values:

Code Subplot 1 center subplot 2 north subplot 3 southeast subplot 4 southwest subplot

Item 2--SUBPLOT PLOT STATUS (Sbplt Status)

Indicate whether or not this subplot currently has at least one accessible forested condition class. When collected: All subplots Field width: 1 digit Tolerance: No errors MQO: At least 99% of the time Values:

1 Sampled – at least one accessible forest land condition present on subplot2 Sampled – no accessible forest land condition present on subplot 3 Nonsampled

Item 3--AK SUBPLOT NONSAMPLED REASON (NonS Reason)

For entire subplots that cannot be sampled, record one of the following reasons. When collected: When SUBPLOT PLOT STATUS = 3 Field width: 2 digits Tolerance: No errors MQO: At least 99% of the time Values:

01 Outside U.S. boundary – Assign this code to condition classes beyond the U.S. border. 02 Denied access area – Any area within the sampled area of a plot to which access is denied

by the legal owner, or to which an owner of the only reasonable route to the plot denies access. There are no minimum area or width requirements for a condition class delineated by denied access. Because a denied-access condition can become accessible in the future, it remains in the sample and is re-examined at the next occasion to determine if access is available.

Page 85: FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF …€¦ · 07/11/2011  · FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF COASTAL ALASKA 2009 Forest Inventory and Analysis Program

Annual Inventory 2009 VII. SUBPLOT INFORMATION

77

03 Hazardous situation – Any area within the sampled area on plot that cannot be accessed because of a hazard or danger, for example cliffs, quarries, strip mines, illegal substance plantations, temporary high water, etc. Although the hazard is not likely to change over time, a hazardous condition remains in the sample and is re-examined at the next occasion to determine if the hazard is still present. There are no minimum size or width requirements for a condition class delineated by a hazardous condition.

04 Time limitation – This code applies to full subplots that cannot be sampled due to a time restriction. This code is reserved for areas with limited access, and in situations where it is imperative for the crew to leave before the plot can be completed (e.g., scheduled helicopter rendezvous). Use of this code requires notification to the field supervisor. This code should not be used for an entire plot (use code 8 (skipped visit, Plot level data) when an entire plot is skipped).

05 Lost data – The plot data file was discovered to be corrupt after a panel was completed and submitted for processing. This code is assigned to entire plots or full subplots that could not be processed, and is applied at the time of processing after notification to the region. Note: This code is for office use only.

10 Other – This code is used whenever a plot or condition class is not sampled due to a reason other than one of the specific reasons already listed. A field note is required to describe the situation.

11 Ocean - Plot falls in ocean water below the mean high tide line. Where rivers or canals enter the ocean, ocean water begins where the river/canal width exceeds ¼ nautical miles.

Item 4--AK Estimated Nonsample Land Cover Type (NonS Land Cvr)

Record an estimate of what cover type has plurality over the entire subplot area. This variable is only available when SUBPLOT NONSAMPLED REASON = 2, 3, 4, or 10 . For example: if the subplot is nonsampled because of hazardous conditions (as would be entered 03 in SUBPLOT NONSAMPLED REASON above), but the subplot area is stocked with mountain hemlock, then enter 270 for the “estimated nonsample land cover type”. Note: land cover type includes: Forest (001), Nonforest (002), Noncensus water(003), and Census water(004). When collected: When SUBPLOT NONSAMPLED REASON = 2, 3, 4, or 10 Field width: 3 digits Tolerance: No errors in group or type MQO: at least 95% of the time in type Values

Code Land Cover Type 001 Forest land (valid only when AK Data Source > 1) 002 Nonforest land 003 Noncensus water 004 Census water Spruce / Fir Group 122 white spruce 125 black spruce Fir / Spruce / Mountain Hemlock Group 264 Pacific silver fir 268 subalpine fir 270 mountain hemlock 271 Alaska-yellow-cedar

Page 86: FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF …€¦ · 07/11/2011  · FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF COASTAL ALASKA 2009 Forest Inventory and Analysis Program

Annual Inventory 2009 VII. SUBPLOT INFORMATION

78

Lodgepole Pine Group 281 lodgepole pine Hemlock / Sitka Spruce Group 301 western hemlock 304 western redcedar 305 Sitka spruce Elm / Ash / Cottonwood Group 703 cottonwood Aspen / Birch Group 901 aspen 902 paper birch Alder / Maple Group 911 red alder

Item 5--SUBPLOT CENTER CONDITION

Record the CONDITION CLASS NUMBER of the condition class at the subplot center.

SUBPLOT CENTER CONDITION is selected from the Plot Menu (cc at centeR) prior to entering the Subplot information screen.

When collected: All subplots on established plots Field width: 1 digit Tolerance: No errors MQO: At least 99% of the time Values: 1 to 9

Item 6--MICROPLOT CENTER CONDITION (Microplot Cond)

Record the CONDITION CLASS NUMBER of the condition class at the microplot center. When collected: All microplots where subplot center is COND. CLASS STATUS = 1, 2, 3 Field width: 1 digit Tolerance: No errors MQO: At least 99% of the time Values: 1 to 9

Item 7--SUBPLOT SLOPE (Slope)

Record the angle of slope across the 24.0 ft radius subplot to the nearest 1 percent. SUBPLOT SLOPE is determined by sighting the clinometer along a line parallel to the average incline (or decline) of each subplot. This angle is measured along the shortest pathway down slope before the drainage direction changes. To measure SUBPLOT SLOPE, Observer 1 should stand at the uphill edge of the subplot and sight Observer 2, who stands at the downhill edge of the subplot. Sight Observer 2 at the same height as the eye-level of Observer 1. Read the slope directly from the percent scale of the clinometer. o If slope changes gradually across the subplot, record an average slope. o If slope changes across the subplot but the slope is predominately of one direction, code

the predominant slope percentage rather than the average. o If the subplot falls directly on or straddles a canyon bottom or narrow ridge top, code the

average slope of the side hill(s).

Page 87: FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF …€¦ · 07/11/2011  · FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF COASTAL ALASKA 2009 Forest Inventory and Analysis Program

Annual Inventory 2009 VII. SUBPLOT INFORMATION

79

o If the subplot falls on a canyon bottom or on a narrow ridge top, but most of the area lies on one side hill, code the slope of the side hill where most of the area lies.

When collected: All subplots with at least one accessible forest land condition present on subplot (SUBPLOT PLOT STATUS = 1) Field width: 3 digits Tolerance: +/- 10% MQO: At least 90% of the time Values: 000 to 155

Item 8--SUBPLOT ASPECT (Aspect)

Record the aspect across the 24.0 ft radius subplot, to the nearest 1-degree. SUBPLOT ASPECT is determined along the direction of slope for land surfaces with at least 5 percent slope in a generally uniform direction. SUBPLOT ASPECT is measured with a hand compass along the same direction used to determine slope.

o If aspect changes gradually across the subplot, record an average aspect. o If aspect changes across the subplot but the aspect is predominately of one direction,

code the predominate direction rather than the average. o If the subplot falls on or straddles a canyon bottom or narrow ridge top, code the

aspect of the ridgeline or canyon bottom. o If the subplot falls on a canyon bottom or on a narrow ridge top, but most of the area

lies on one side hill, code the aspect of the side hill. When collected: All subplots with at least one accessible forest land condition present on subplot (SUBPLOT PLOT STATUS = 1) Field width: 3 digits Tolerance: +/- 10 degrees MQO: At least 90% of the time Values:

Code Aspect 000 no aspect, slope < 5 percent 001 1 degree 002 2 degrees * * * * 360 360 degrees, due north

Item 9--SNOW/WATER DEPTH (Snow/Water Dept)

Record to the nearest 0.1 foot. the average approximate depth of water, snow, or ice covering the 24.0 ft radius subplot at the time of data collection. This variable is used to indicate plots where some variables (e.g. seedling count, total lengths) may be measured with less certainty due to conditions at the time of measurement. This item is intended for water/snow/ice which covers substantial portions of subplots. Do not record the depth of streams or other water sources if contained within their established banks and are not affecting tree or vegetation measurements.

When collected: All subplots with at least one accessible forest land condition present on subplot (SUBPLOT PLOT STATUS=1)

Page 88: FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF …€¦ · 07/11/2011  · FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF COASTAL ALASKA 2009 Forest Inventory and Analysis Program

Annual Inventory 2009 VII. SUBPLOT INFORMATION

80

Field width: 2 digits (x.y) Tolerance: +/- 0.5 ft MQO: at the time of measurement (no MQO after initial date of visit) Values: 0.0 to 9.9

Item 10--AK Vegetation Community Description for Label

To fully automate Specimen Label, enter a brief description of the community type to aid taxonomist in the identification of any specimens collected from this subplot. Community descriptions often describe the dominant overstory species (i.e.: Open mixed conifer, closed paper birch, alder-willow shrub, bearberry tundra) Note: This variable does not need to be collected if there is no Invasive Species (or suspected Invasive Species) encountered on the subplot. See -Invasive Plant Species- section below. When collected: If an Invasive Species (or suspect Invasive Species) is recorded on the subplot. Field width: 40 characters Tolerance: No errors MQO: 99 % of the time Values: English words or phrases that describe plant community

Item 11--SUBPLOT NOTES

Record any notes needed to clarify or explain a special situation encountered on the Subplot. Accessible by pushing the F4 key while in the Subplot Information screen When collected: As needed Field width: 40 Tolerance: N/A MQO: N/A Values: Single words and abbreviated sentences

Note: Any changes in condition class will need a note of “ftchange” in subplot notes for each subplot this change occurs. A detailed explanation of the “ftchange” note will then need to be written in the location record explaining whether the change was a procedural change or it was an actual change on the ground.

Page 89: FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF …€¦ · 07/11/2011  · FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF COASTAL ALASKA 2009 Forest Inventory and Analysis Program

Annual Inventory 2009 VII. SUBPLOT INFORMATION

81

- INVASIVE PLANT SPECIES - Accessible by selecting “Subpl Info” in the Plot Menu Non-native invasive plants displace native vegetation, degrade wildlife habitat, and negatively affect human health, the economy, and the environment. Factors such as geographic isolation and harsh winters have protected Alaska from large-scale invasive plant infestations in the past. Recently, however, some of the most harmful noxious weeds of the lower 48 states have begun to grow and spread in Alaska. Occasionally, invasive species data will be collected on a plot that also requires VEGETATION PROFILE (P2 VEG Profile [wilderness only]), and/or VEGETATION DIVERSITY AND STRUCTURE (P3 VEG [wilderness and non-wilderness]). In these cases, all crew members involved in vegetation measurements should work closely to capture the full list (if any) and percent cover of all invasives encountered on the 24.0 foot radius plot. The invasive species protocol will be followed for all accessible ground visited plots that fall in the Alaska Coastal Annual unit. At each subplot a quick search will be conducted to identify all targeted plants, regardless of cover, that are either rooted or overhang within the 24.0 foot radius. If invasive plants are detected, an estimate of the percent cover within the subplot will be made. Invasive plant data collection will occur on all accessible subplots, regardless of whether the condition is forest or nonforest. Invasive plant species data are not collected on hazardous, access denied, out of unit, or water [ocean, census/non-census] subplots. Item 1--AK Subplot Number

Record the code corresponding to the number of the subplot. This code will be pre-determined from the Plot Menu of the allegro program by selecting “chOOse subplot” and entering the appropriate subplot number (values shown in the table below). When in the “Subplot Invasives” screen the subplot number will be shown in the upper right end of the top row. Make sure that this is the correct subplot before entering data. When collected: All Subplots Field width: 1 digit Tolerance: No errors MQO: At least 99% of the time Values:

Code Subplot number 1 Center subplot 2 North subplot 3 Southeast subplot 4 Southwest subplot

--VEGETATION COMMUNITY DESCRIPTION for Specimen Label

This variable must be filled out in the Subplot Attributes screen accessible by entering “Subpl Info” from the Plot Menu. For a complete description of this variable see Item 10 on

Page 90: FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF …€¦ · 07/11/2011  · FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF COASTAL ALASKA 2009 Forest Inventory and Analysis Program

Annual Inventory 2009 VII. SUBPLOT INFORMATION

82

page 80. This variable does not need to be collected if there is no Invasive Species (or suspect Invasive Species) encountered on the subplot.

Item 2--AK Species (NRCS Code) Each species record must have a valid species code recorded (see values below). If a plant is suspected to be invasive, and may or may not be one of the species listed below, and cannot be identified to species in the field, enter the unknown symbol of “2PLANT”. NOTE: Collect a voucher specimen for any recorded species. When Collected: All Accessible Subplots where listed species are observed. Field Width: 10 digits Tolerance: No errors MQO: 99% of the time Values:

CODE PLANTS Species Common ALPE4 Alliaria petiolata Garlic mustard BRIN2 Bromus inermis Smooth brome BRTE Bromus tectorum Downy brome, cheatgrass CABU2 Capsella bursa-pastoris Shepard’s purse CAAR18 Caragana arborescens Siberian peashrub CEBI2 Centaurea biebersteinii Spotted knapweed CIAR4 Cirsium arvense Canada thistle CIVU Cirsium vulgare Bull thistle CRTE3 Crepis tectorum Narrowleaf hawksbeard CYSC4 Cytisus scoparius Scotchbroom DAGL Dactyllis glomerata Orchard grass ELRE4 Elymus repens Quackgrass GALEO Galeopsis sp. Hempnettle HIAU Hieracium aurantiacum Orange hawkweed HIPI Hieracium pilosella Mouseear hawkweed HICA10 Hieracium caespitosum Meadow hawkweed HIUM Hieracium umbellatum Narrowleaf hawkweed HOJU Hordeum jubatum Foxtail barley HYRA3 Hypochaeris radicata Hairy catsear

IMGL Impatiens glandulifera Ornamental jewelweed, Himalayan balsam

LASQ Lappula squarrosa Bluebur LEVU Leucanthemum vulgare Oxeye daisy

LIVU2 Linaria vulgaris Common toadflax, Butter and eggs

LOLIU Lolium sp. Ryegrass MADI6 Matricaria discoidea Pineapple weed MEDIC Medicago sp. Alfalfa MEAL12 Melilotus alba Sweetclover, white MEOF Melilotus officinalis Sweetclover, yellow PHAR3 Phalaris arundinacea Reed canarygrass

Page 91: FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF …€¦ · 07/11/2011  · FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF COASTAL ALASKA 2009 Forest Inventory and Analysis Program

Annual Inventory 2009 VII. SUBPLOT INFORMATION

83

PHPR3 Phleum pratense Timothy PLMA2 Plantago major Plantain POAV Polygonum aviculare Prostrate knotweed POCU6 Polygonum cuspidatum Japanese knotweed PRPA5 Prunus padus European bird cherry RARE3 Ranunculus repens Creeping buttercup SEJA Senecio jacobaea Tansy ragwort SEVU Senecio vulgaris Common groundsel SOAR2 Sonchus arvensis Perennial sowthistle STME2 Stellaria media Common chickweed TAOF Taraxacum officinale Dandelion TAVU Tanacetum vulgare Common tansy TRDU Tragopogon dubius Western salsify TRIFO Trifolium sp. Clover VICRC Vicia cracca Bird vetch 2PLANT Place holder for suspect invasive plant

Item 3--AK Percent Cover

A rapid canopy cover estimate is made for each species for all invasive species foliage across all layer heights. Canopy cover is based on a vertically-projected polygon described by the outline of the foliage, ignoring any normal spaces occurring between the leaves of the plant (Daubenmire 1959). Canopy cover is estimated as a percentage of the entire 24-ft radius subplot. In cases where the subplot is not fully accessible (access denied, hazardous, water, etc.), record the percent cover on the accessible portions as if the subplot was 100% accessible. That is, if cover is about equal to a circle with a radius of 5.3 ft, enter 5%, as you would for a fully forested subplot, on any partially forested subplot. This situation applies for dealing with portions of a plot that may be inaccessible. If cover is greater than 0% but less than 1%, enter “t” for trace. For species of moderate cover, it may be easiest to divide the subplots into quarters, estimate canopy cover of each quarter separately, and then add them together. The following area-cover sizes may be useful in developing estimates for an entirely forested subplot:

Subplot radius = 24.0 feet, Subplot area = 1809 ft2

Cover Area (ft2)

Length of a side of a square(ft)

Radius of circular area(ft)

1% 18 4.3 2.4 3% 54 7.4 4.1 5% 90 9.5 5.3 10% 181 13.4 7.6 20% 362 19 10.7

When collected: For every SPECIES record Field width: 3 digits Tolerance: +/- 1 class based on the following canopy cover classes: t, 1-5%, 6-10%, 11-20%, 21-40%, 41-60%, 61-80%, and 81-100%

Page 92: FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF …€¦ · 07/11/2011  · FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF COASTAL ALASKA 2009 Forest Inventory and Analysis Program

Annual Inventory 2009 VII. SUBPLOT INFORMATION

84

MQO: at least 90% of the time Values: t, 000 to 100

Item 4--AK Unique Species Number

When any code is entered for the first time on a plot, the UNIQUE SPECIES NUMBER is “1”. If more than one unidentified species is discovered that is described by “2PLANT”, the next sequential number is assigned. If a recorded unidentified species is encountered again elsewhere on the plot, the Vegetation Specialist must record the UNIQUE SPECIES NUMBER that corresponds to the earlier encountered specimen. When collected: All species records. Field width: 2 digits Tolerance: No errors MQO: 99% of the time Values: 1-99, assigned in sequential numbers

Item 5--AK Specimen Officially Collected Record if a specimen was collected or not for each invasive species observed, including unknown codes entered as a new unique species. When collected: For all codes. Field width: 1 digit Tolerance: No errors MQO: 99% of the time Values:

1 Yes, a specimen was officially collected 0 No, a specimen was not officially collected

Item 6--AK Specimen Label Number

Record the label number for the collected specimen. Numbered labels are provided to each vegetation specialist by your regional coordinator. When collected: AK Specimen Officially Collected = 1 Field width: 5 digits Tolerance: No errors MQO: 99% of the time Values: 1 to 99999, as pre-printed and assigned by region.

Item 7--AK Specimen Not Officially Collected Reason Code

Record the code that describes why a specimen has not been collected. Because we want voucher specimens collected, there are only a few reasons not to collect: When collected: AK Specimen Officially Collected = 0 Field width: 2 digits Tolerance: No errors MQO: 99% of the time Values:

Page 93: FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF …€¦ · 07/11/2011  · FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF COASTAL ALASKA 2009 Forest Inventory and Analysis Program

Annual Inventory 2009 VII. SUBPLOT INFORMATION

85

Code Description 03 Hazardous situation 04 Time limitation 06 Specimen collected for immediate/local identification only 10 Other - explain in notes

Item 8--AK Invasive Plant Notes

Record any notes needed to clarify or explain a special situation in the particular Invasive Species record being defined. Accessible by pushing the F4 key. When collected: As needed and when AK Specimen Not Collected Reason Code = 10. Field width: 40 Tolerance: N/A MQO: N/A Values: Single words and abbreviated sentences

VOUCHER SPECIMEN COLLECTION When you encounter a plant species suspected to be a listed invasive species, collect a voucher specimen, following these basic steps: Use a digging tool to extract the entire plant, including any underground portions, flowers, fruits, and leaves. If the plant is abundant, collection of two samples will increase the likelihood of a good specimen. If it’s an edible species, collect as much as possible for Misha’s dinner salad. Collected specimens should be transported in the field and from the field in the 1 and/or 2 gallon zip-lock bags provided. Only one species and label may be placed in a single bag. Acceptable methods of transporting collected specimens include:

o Use a 3-hole-punch to punch holes in the bottom of your bags prior to traveling in the field. Place the punched bags into a 2-inch 3-ring binder with the zip-lock portion facing outward. Plants can then be placed with labels into the bag directly in the binder. This method prevents crumpling, tearing, and destroying the specimen during transportation.

o Use a 1-hole-punch to punch a hole in the one upper corner of each bag. The hole

should be placed in such a manner that it cannot easily be torn. Place the bags on an aluminum carabineer (available at drug stores) or on heavy twine and fasten to your field vest or backpack. Be careful to seal the plants and labels securely inside the bags to prevent accidental loss.

A set of pre-printed labels for unknown specimens (Figure X.1) will be available for crews. A Pre-printed label will be placed in the bag with the specimen. Record the pre-printed label number corresponding to the voucher specimen in Item 7. Full labels will be printed in the office from downloaded PDR data. Properly used labels are essential for tracking specimens and updating species records.

Page 94: FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF …€¦ · 07/11/2011  · FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF COASTAL ALASKA 2009 Forest Inventory and Analysis Program

Annual Inventory 2009 VII. SUBPLOT INFORMATION

86

Label Number:1 SPECIES CODE: P3Hexagon: ……… Plot: 1 Subplot: 1 P3Quad: Date: 8/06/03 Unknown Code:ACANT2 Unique Species Nbr:1 Veg Spec. crew: John Doe State: MN County: Hubbard Community: Spruce-Fir Notes: opposite leaves, square stem, purple flowers, minty fragrance, possibly peppermint

Figure X.1. Example of label for unknown specimen. Press and label if not identified by the end of the day

1. Each specimen representing a unique species should be placed individually inside a single layer of folded newsprint. Each specimen is to be accompanied by its corresponding specimen label. Small plant specimens are to be pressed individually. Large plant specimens may be folded in a “v”, “z”, or “w” arrangement to fit on a single newsprint page. Arrange the specimen so that at least one upper and one lower leaf surface is exposed. Plants may be trimmed to reduce bulk, so long as all diagnostic parts are included. Diagnostic portions include stem sections, petioles, leaves, roots, flowers, and fruits. Bulky fruits or nuts may be stored separately in a paper envelope that is taped to the newsprint and is accompanied by an identical copy of the specimen’s unknown label. Species codes can be written on the outside of the folded newspaper to aid sorting as specimens are processed.

2. Stack the specimens in their individual newsprint sleeves between two pieces of

cardboard. Bind the cardboard and plants together using a piece of twine or flat cloth ribbon wrapped around the length and width of the cardboard bundle. For mailing numerous specimens, several bundles may be used. Place all bundles inside a cardboard box for shipping.

Package and submit specimens as dictated by your region or lab. All packaged specimens are to be accompanied by a legible completed label. Unknown reports tracking collected plants are generated from the PDR plot file.

Page 95: FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF …€¦ · 07/11/2011  · FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF COASTAL ALASKA 2009 Forest Inventory and Analysis Program

Annual Inventory 2009 VII. SUBPLOT INFORMATION

87

- SUBPLOT MAPPING - Accessible by selecting Subpl info in the Plot Menu. BOUNDARY REFERENCES Boundary reference data are used to compute the area for the condition classes sampled on a plot and to remeasure plots. Record all boundaries between condition classes that occur within the sampled (fixed-radius) area on subplots and microplots. Boundaries outside sampled (fixed-radius) areas are not referenced. In addition to using the recording procedures described herein, sketch maps of condition class boundaries onto the pre-printed plot diagrams on paper field tally sheets. BOUNDARIES ON REMEASUREMENT PLOTS When re-visiting a plot that has previous boundary mapping of condition classes, it is important not to be too critical of slight differences in azimuth and distance numbers. If the previous mapping is generally similar to the current boundary configuration, then do not change previous numbers. However, if there is a significant change in condition classes, a gross error by the previous crew, or a change in the procedures from what was initially used; then enter the correct boundary data. Be sure to describe changes in notes and on plot write-up. REFERENCE PROCEDURE Reference, within the sampled area on each microplot and subplot the approximate boundary of each condition class that differs from the condition classes at a subplot center. Trees selected on these fixed-radius plots are assigned to the actual condition in which they lie regardless of the recorded approximate boundary delineated. Subplot boundary referencing is done by recording azimuths and distances from subplot center to the reference points and/or from microplot center to the reference points (see examples on page 90). Each boundary is marked by a maximum of three points - two where the boundary intersects the subplot circumference or microplot circumference, and one "corner" point between the two end points, if necessary. Only the corner point requires a distance, since the distance from the center to the circumference is always equal to the fixed plot radius. Microplot boundaries are referenced from the microplot center Refer to section A on page 46 and section D page 50 for the general condition class delineation guidelines. For Condition class status (B) and Accessible Forest Land (E) on pages 47 and 56. The following additional rules apply when referencing a boundary within a subplot or microplot:

1. When a boundary between accessible forest land and nonforest land or between two contrasting accessible forest land condition classes is clearly marked, use that feature to define the boundary. Examples of clear demarcation are a fence line, plowed field edge, sharp ridgeline, defined stem line, and water's edge along a stream course, ditch, or canal.

2. When a boundary between forest land and nonforest land is not clearly marked by an

obvious feature, the boundary should follow the nonforest side of the stems of the trees at the forest edge.

Page 96: FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF …€¦ · 07/11/2011  · FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF COASTAL ALASKA 2009 Forest Inventory and Analysis Program

Annual Inventory 2009 VII. SUBPLOT INFORMATION

88

3. When a boundary between two contrasting forest land condition classes is not clearly marked, map along the stems of the contrasting condition. When the boundary between two contrasting forest land condition classes is separated by a narrow linear inclusion (creek, fire line, narrow meadow, unimproved road), establish the boundary at the far edge, relative to subplot center, of the inclusion.

4. When a plot is remeasured, the crew will examine the boundaries referenced at last

inventory. If no change has occurred, the current crew will retain the boundary data that were recorded at last inventory. If a boundary has changed, or a new boundary is present, or the previous crew made an obvious error, record new or updated boundary data. Delete boundaries that are no longer distinct.

5. Although individual MQOs are specified for the azimuths and distances, in practice a

crew will be considered ‘correct’ when the difference in areas as mapped by the original crew and by the QA crew is less than 10 percent of the subplot or microplot area. This allows for slight variations in azimuths or distances due to the approximate nature of mapping procedures.

BOUNDARY DATA Record the appropriate value for each of the following data items for each boundary mapped on the subplot or microplot. If no boundaries are recorded for a subplot, enter one record with PLOT TYPE = 0. Item 1--SUBPLOT NUMBER

Record the code corresponding to the number of the subplot.

This code will be pre-determined from the Plot Menu of the allegro program by selecting “chOOse subplot” and entering the appropriate subplot number (values shown in the table below). When in the “Subplot Mapping” screen the subplot number will be shown in the upper right end of the top row. Make sure that this is the correct subplot before entering data. When collected: All boundaries Field width: 1 digit Tolerance: No errors MQO: At least 99% of the time Values:

Code Subplot number 1 Center subplot 2 North subplot 3 Southeast subplot 4 Southwest subplot

Item 2--PLOT TYPE (P)

Record the code to specify whether the boundary data are for a subplot or microplot. If no boundaries are recorded for a subplot, enter one record with PLOT TYPE = 0.

When collected: All boundaries Field width: 1 digit

Page 97: FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF …€¦ · 07/11/2011  · FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF COASTAL ALASKA 2009 Forest Inventory and Analysis Program

Annual Inventory 2009 VII. SUBPLOT INFORMATION

89

Tolerance: No errors MQO: At least 99% of the time Values:

Code Plot Type 0 No boundaries are recorded for the subplot 1 Subplot boundary 2 Microplot boundary

Item 3--CONTRASTING CONDITION (C)

Record the CONDITION CLASS NUMBER of the condition class that contrasts with the condition class located at the subplot center (for boundaries on the subplot) or at the microplot center (for boundaries on the microplot), e.g., the condition class present on the other side of the boundary line.

When collected: All boundaries Field width: 1 digit Tolerance: No errors MQO: At least 99% of the time Values: 1 to 9

Item 4--LEFT AZIMUTH (LAzm)

Record, in degrees, the azimuth from the subplot or microplot center to the farthest left point (facing the contrasting condition class) where the boundary intersects the subplot or microplot circumference.

When collected: All boundaries Field width: 3 digits Tolerance: +/- 10 degrees MQO: At least 90% of the time Values: 001 to 360

Item 5--RIGHT AZIMUTH (RAzm)

Record, in degrees, the azimuth from the subplot or microplot center to the farthest right point (facing the contrasting condition class) where the boundary intersects the subplot or microplot plot circumference. When collected: All boundaries Field width: 3 digits Tolerance: +/- 10- degrees MQO: At least 90% of the time Values: 001 to 360

Item 6--CORNER AZIMUTH (CAzm)

Record, in degrees, the azimuth from the subplot or microplot center to a corner or curve in a boundary. If a boundary is best described by a straight line between two circumference points, then record 000 for CORNER AZIMUTH. When collected: All boundaries

Page 98: FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF …€¦ · 07/11/2011  · FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF COASTAL ALASKA 2009 Forest Inventory and Analysis Program

Annual Inventory 2009 VII. SUBPLOT INFORMATION

90

Field width: 3 digits Tolerance: +/- 10 degrees MQO: At least 90% of the time Values: 000 to 360 (000=None)

Item 7--CORNER DISTANCE (Cdist)

Record the horizontal distance, to the nearest 1 foot, from the subplot or microplot center to a boundary corner point. When collected: All boundaries when CORNER AZIMUTH > 000 Field width: 2 digits Tolerance: +/- 1 ft MQO: At least 90% of the time Values:

Plot Type Values for Corner Distance Microplot 01 to 07 ft (actual limiting distance is 6.8 ft.) Subplot 01 to 24 ft.

Boundary mapping examples

How to measure a straight boundary on a microplot or subplot.

Page 99: FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF …€¦ · 07/11/2011  · FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF COASTAL ALASKA 2009 Forest Inventory and Analysis Program

Annual Inventory 2009 VII. SUBPLOT INFORMATION

91

How to measure a boundary with a corner on a microplot or subplot.

Item 8--BOUNDARY NOTES

Record any notes needed to clarify or explain a special situation in the particular Boundary being defined.

Accessible by pushing the F4 key, can enter a note for each individual boundary record (line).

When collected: As needed Field width: 40 Tolerance: N/A MQO: N/A Values: Single words and abbreviated sentences

Page 100: FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF …€¦ · 07/11/2011  · FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF COASTAL ALASKA 2009 Forest Inventory and Analysis Program

Annual Inventory 2009 VII. SUBPLOT INFORMATION

92

- SEEDLING DATA - Accessible by selecting Subpl info in the Plot Menu. Stocking, regeneration, and biomass information are obtained by counting live seedlings within the 6.8-foot radius microplot located 90 degrees and 12.0 feet from each subplot center within each of the four subplots. The base of the seedling (center of bole) must be at or within the 6.8 foot radius in order to qualify for counting. Conifer seedlings must be at least 0.5 foot in length and less than 1.0 inch at DBH in order to qualify for tallying. Hardwood seedlings must be at least 1.0 foot in length and less than 1.0 inch at DBH in order to qualify for tallying. Seedlings are counted singly or in groups by species and condition class. Only count seedlings occurring in accessible forest land condition classes. For 2009 an additional form will be printed and included in the plot folder. On this form record seedlings on the microplots that were not tallied in the data recorder due to seedlings being suspended with an air-gap between the seedlings roots and the forest floor (example: a seedling rooted at a location on a log where the log is suspended). Follow normal seedling protocol but only tally these suspended seedlings. Item 1--SUBPLOT NUMBER

Note: Subplot number will be shown in the upper right corner of the SEEDLING DATA screen (and will not be editable in the screen). This number will have been determined by selecting the appropriate subplot in the “chOOse subplot” screen (available in the Plot Menu). When Collected: All counts of seedlings Note: Do not record anything if no seedlings are present within microplot. Field width: 1 Tolerance: No errors MQO: 100 % of the time Values: 1-4

Item 2--SPECIES

Record the appropriate species code from the list provided below. If you encounter a species not listed and are not sure if it should be tallied as a tree seedling, consult with your Field Supervisor. If the species cannot be determined in the field, tally the seedling, but bring branch samples, foliage, flowers, bark, etc. to your supervisor for identification. If possible collect samples outside the subplots from similar specimens and make a note to correct the SPECIES code later. When Collected: All counts of seedlings Field width: 3 digits Tolerance: No errors for genus, no errors for species MQO: At least 90% of the time for genus, at least 85% of the time for species

Values: CODE SPECIES CODE SPECIES 011 Pacific silver fir 242 western redcedar 019 subalpine fir 263 western hemlock 042 Alaska yellow-cedar 264 mountain hemlock 071 tamarack (native) (u) 351 red alder 094 white spruce 375 paper birch 095 black spruce 661 Oregon crabapple (u) 098 sitka spruce 746 quaking aspen

Page 101: FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF …€¦ · 07/11/2011  · FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF COASTAL ALASKA 2009 Forest Inventory and Analysis Program

Annual Inventory 2009 VII. SUBPLOT INFORMATION

93

108 lodgepole pine 747 black cottonwood 231 Pacific yew (u)

(u) = uncommon Item 3--CONDITION CLASS NUMBER

Assign the appropriate CONDITION CLASS NUMBER (as defined in the CONDITION CLASS chapter) to the seedling or group of seedlings that are rooted in the respective condition. Remember, seedling counts are not to be performed in non-forest conditions. When Collected: All counts of seedlings Field width: 1 digit Tolerance: No errors MQO: At least 99% of the time Values: 1-9

General Seedling Count Rules:

o Multiple “suckers” that originate from the same location, and stump sprouts are considered one seedling.

o Do not tally any seedlings that sprout from a live tally tree. o Measure seedling length not “height”, if a seedling is twisted or leaning measure along

the main stem from ground level to the dominant apical leader. o Do not tally or count “layers” (undetached tree branches partially or completely covered

by soil and/or organic materials, usually at the base) as seedlings. Item 4--SEEDLING COUNT

On each microplot, record the number of live tally tree seedlings, by species and condition class. Conifer seedlings must be at least 6.0 inches in length and less than 1.0 inch at DBH to qualify for counting. Hardwood seedlings must be at least 12.0 inches in length and less than 1.0 inch at DBH in order to qualify for counting. When collected: Each accessible forest land condition class on each microplot Field width: 3 digits Tolerance: No errors for 5 or less per species; +/-20% over a count of 5 MQO: 90% of the time Values: 001-999

Item 5--SEEDLING NOTES

Record any notes needed to clarify or explain a special situation in the particular Seedling record being defined. Accessible by pushing the F4 key, When collected: As needed Field width: 40 Tolerance: N/A MQO: N/A Values: Single words and abbreviated sentences

Page 102: FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF …€¦ · 07/11/2011  · FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF COASTAL ALASKA 2009 Forest Inventory and Analysis Program

Annual Inventory 2009 VIII. TREE AND SAPLING DATA

94

VIII. TREE AND SAPLING DATA

Item 1--SUBPLOT NUMBER ............................................................................................97 Item 2--TREE RECORD NUMBER (Trn) ..........................................................................97 Item 3--CONDITION CLASS NUMBER (C) ......................................................................98 Item 4--AK PREVIOUS TREE STATUS (p) ......................................................................99 Item 5--PNW PRESENT TREE STATUS (S) ....................................................................99 Item 6--PNW Subplot Tally Tree Witness Flag.............................................................101 Item 7--AK STANDING DEAD ........................................................................................101 Item 8--AK RECONCILE (I) ............................................................................................102 Item 9--AK Previous Species (sPc) ..............................................................................103 Item 10--SPECIES (sPc).................................................................................................103 Item 11--AK Previous Azimuth (aZm) ...........................................................................104 Item 12--AZIMUTH (aZm) ...............................................................................................105 Item 13--AK Previous Horizontal Distance (Hdis) .......................................................105 Item 14--HORIZONTAL DISTANCE (Hdis) ....................................................................106 Item 15--PNW Slope Distance to Witness Tree or Object (sdi) ..................................106 Item 16--AK Previous Diameter at Breast Height (pdia) .............................................106 Item 17--DIAMETER (Diam) ...........................................................................................107 Item 18--AK DIAMETER CHECK (c) ..............................................................................112 Item 19--PNW 10-Yr Increment (Inc) .............................................................................112 Item 20--ACTUAL LENGTH (alE)...................................................................................113 Item 21--AK LENGTH METHOD.....................................................................................114 Item 22--PNW Previous Length.....................................................................................114 Item 23--TOTAL LENGTH (tLe)......................................................................................114 Item 24--COMPACTED CROWN RATIO (cR) ................................................................115 Item 25--CROWN CLASS (c)..........................................................................................115 Item 26--ROTTEN/MISSING CULL (rc) ..........................................................................116 Item 27--AK Tree Class (E) ............................................................................................117 Item 28--DECAY CLASS (d)...........................................................................................118 Item 29--AK MORTALITY YEAR ....................................................................................119 Item 30--AK CAUSE OF DEATH (cd) ............................................................................119 Item 31--TREE NOTES ...................................................................................................120

Page 103: FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF …€¦ · 07/11/2011  · FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF COASTAL ALASKA 2009 Forest Inventory and Analysis Program

Annual Inventory 2009 VIII. TREE AND SAPLING DATA

95

VIII. TREE AND SAPLING DATA A. Introduction Trees and snags (> 5.0 in. d.b.h.) are sampled using the 1/24 acre fixed-radius subplot. Each subplot has a fixed-radius of 24.0 feet horizontal. HORIZONTAL DISTANCE and AZIMUTH for trees and snags (≥ 5.0 in d.b.h.) are measured from the appropriate subplot center. Saplings (1.0 in. to 4.9 in. d.b.h.) are sampled more efficiently using the small fixed-radius microplot. Each microplot has a fixed-radius of 6.8 feet horizontal. Saplings must be live at time of measurement. DISTANCE and AZIMUTH for live saplings are measured from microplot center. B. Determining if a tree/sapling/seedling is selected on a fixed-radius plot Trees/saplings/seedlings are selected for measurement only when the distance from their bole center (a.k.a. pith) at the ground, to the subplot center is less than the radius of that subplot/microplot plot (see figure below).

Note: The method for determining whether a tree/sapling was selected for measurement in the previous (periodic) Alaska inventory was different than current annual procedures. Previously a tree/sapling was selected for measurement if the bole center of the tree at dbh was at or within the fixed plot radius. Note that in this inventory, the tree/sapling will be selected if the bole center at the ground is within the fixed plot radius. There is no difference in method between both types of inventory for Seedling selection on the fixed plot radius

Trees at least 5.0 inches in diameter are sampled within the 24.0 foot subplot. ‘Tally trees’ are defined as all live and standing dead trees in accessible forest land condition classes encountered on the subplot the first time a subplot is established, and all trees that grow into a subplot thereafter. These data yield information on tree volume, growth, mortality, and removals; wildlife habitats; forest structure and composition; biomass; and carbon sequestration. Trees with a diameter at least 1.0 inch but less than 5.0 inches, termed saplings, are sampled within the microplot. ‘Tally saplings’ are defined as all live saplings in accessible forest land condition classes encountered the first time a microplot is established, and all saplings that grow into each microplot thereafter are included until they grow to 5.0 inches or larger, at which time they are tallied on the 24.0 foot subplot and referenced (new AZIMUTH and HORIZONTAL DISTANCE taken) to the subplot center.

Page 104: FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF …€¦ · 07/11/2011  · FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF COASTAL ALASKA 2009 Forest Inventory and Analysis Program

Annual Inventory 2009 VIII. TREE AND SAPLING DATA

96

Trees are alive if they have any living parts (leaves, buds, and cambium) at or above the point of diameter measurement (DBH). Trees that have been temporarily defoliated are still alive. Once tallied, dead trees over 5.0 inches in diameter are tracked until they no longer qualify as standing dead. Working around dead trees is a safety hazard - crews should exercise extreme caution! Trees that are deemed unsafe to measure should be estimated. To qualify as a standing dead tally tree, dead trees must be at least 5.0 inches in diameter, have a bole which has an unbroken ACTUAL LENGTH of at least 4.5 feet, and lean less than 45 degrees from vertical as measured from the base of the tree to 4.5 feet. Portions of boles on dead trees that are separated greater than 50 percent (either above or below 4.5 feet), are considered severed and are included in Down Woody Materials (DWM) if they otherwise meet DWM tally criteria. Live and dead standing tally trees, and partially separated boles of dead tally trees, do not have to be self-supported. They may be supported by other trees, branches, or their crown. Trees that have been cut above DBH qualify as tally trees, provided they meet the size (DBH) requirement. The following apply at remeasurement:

o If at the previous visit a forked tree was recorded as two separate trees but should have been recorded as one tree, delete one tree and correct the diameter for the remaining tree. Record an explanation in TREE NOTES.

o If at the previous visit a forked tree was recorded as one tree but should have been

recorded as two separate trees, correct the diameter for the remeasured tree to represent one tree, and add the other fork as a new tree. Record an explanation in TREE NOTES.

Begin tallying trees at an azimuth of 001 degrees from subplot center and continue clockwise around the subplot. Repeat this sequence for trees on the microplot.

C. Tree and sapling data Follow the steps below: 1.) If the condition class is accessible forest land (CONDITION CLASS STATUS = 1) follow these steps for trees/saplings in the condition class:

a. Tally all trees live and ≥ 5.0 in. d.b.h. that are within the 24.0 ft. subplot. Assign a PRESENT TREE STATUS = 1.

b. Tally all trees standing dead, ≥ 5.0 in. d.b.h., ≥ 4.5 feet tall, leaning < 45 degrees from vertical, that are within the 24.0 ft. subplot.

Assign a PRESENT TREE STATUS = 2. c. Tally all live trees 1.0 to 4.9 in. d.b.h. that are within the 6.8 ft. microplot.

Page 105: FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF …€¦ · 07/11/2011  · FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF COASTAL ALASKA 2009 Forest Inventory and Analysis Program

Annual Inventory 2009 VIII. TREE AND SAPLING DATA

97

Assign a PRESENT TREE STATUS = 1. 2.) If the condition class is NOT accessible forest land (Nonforest, Nonsampled, Census/Noncensus Water): Do not tally live trees, saplings, dead trees (snags), or seedlings D. Notes on Tree Record Data Entry (Field Data Recorder) Record one line on the data recorder for each tree sampled. Required data items for these trees vary by subplot, condition class and tree status. Use this section to determine which items to complete for a particular kind of tree. For each condition class where there are no tree records for the condition class other than TREE STATUS of 2 (snag), 8 (witness, non-tally tree), or 9 (witness-other) within the 24.0 feet of subplot center, record one line with the subplot number, the condition class number, a PRESENT TREE STATUS of "N" and enter "NO TALLY" in tree notes. If all forest condition classes within subplot 1 are "NO TALLY", two additional records are required to witness subplot center. These witness records can represent sound stumps or snags, but live trees are preferable If both a forest and nonforest condition class is mapped on a subplot's 24.0-foot fixed-radius plot, enter one line for each nonforest condition class; for each of these records, enter the subplot number, condition class number, and a PRESENT TREE STATUS of N, and enter "NO TALLY" in tree notes. Item 1--SUBPLOT NUMBER

Record the subplot number where the tree occurs.

Note: Subplot number will be shown in the lower left corner of the TREE & SAPLING DATA screen (and will not be editable in the screen). This number will have been determined by selecting the appropriate subplot in the chOOse subplot screen in the Plot Menu.

When Collected: All live and standing dead tally trees > 1.0 in d.b.h., witness only trees Field width: 1 digit Tolerance: No errors MQO: At least 99% of the time Values:

1 Center subplot 2 North subplot 3 Southeast subplot 4 Southwest subplot

Item 2--TREE RECORD NUMBER (Trn)

Record a code to uniquely and permanently identify each tree on a given subplot. The TREE RECORD NUMBERS must be unique within a subplot – being unique is more important than being sequential. In general, work clockwise from azimuth 001 to 360, and work outwards from subplot center to subplot perimeter. On remeasured plots, use the previously assigned tree number. Saplings tallied on microplots will retain their initially assigned tree number if they grow to tree size. Missed trees will be assigned the next

Page 106: FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF …€¦ · 07/11/2011  · FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF COASTAL ALASKA 2009 Forest Inventory and Analysis Program

Annual Inventory 2009 VIII. TREE AND SAPLING DATA

98

available tree number. DO NOT renumber all plot trees in order to assign a more “correct” tree number to a missed tree. Numbers assigned to trees that are subsequently found to be extra will be dropped and not reused.

All tree record numbers will be “written” on the matching tree with an orange (or other bright color) paint sticks/crayons, try to place the number facing plot center. If the plot is in National Forest Wilderness, paintsticks are not to be used on any tree in any way. For PNW Plot Kind = 1 plots the TREE RECORD NUMBER will start at 001 with the first tree and continue in sequence. If after entering several trees you find that a tree was missed, go ahead and add it even though the tree record number will not match the sequence based on Azimuth. On remeasured plots (PNW Plot Kind = 2) the tree record numbers will be downloaded from the previous visit. If there is a gap in the numbering sequence on the downloaded trees (i.e. jumps from 1 to 5) do not use the missing numbers for new trees. Any additional trees during the current visit will be given the next number (in sequence) after the highest downloaded tree record number. Be sure to account for all trees (using proper RECONCILE codes if needed) that were recorded during the previous sample. When collected: All live tally trees ≥ 1.0 in dbh and standing dead tally trees ≥ 5.0 in, witness only trees Field width: 3 digits Tolerance: No errors MQO: At least 99% of time Values: 001 to 999

Item 3--CONDITION CLASS NUMBER (C)

Record the CONDITION CLASS NUMBER in which each tree is located. Often, a referenced boundary is approximate, and trees selected for tally are assigned to the actual condition in which they lie regardless of the recorded approximate boundary See Example Next Page

Page 107: FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF …€¦ · 07/11/2011  · FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF COASTAL ALASKA 2009 Forest Inventory and Analysis Program

Annual Inventory 2009 VIII. TREE AND SAPLING DATA

99

Ragged CONDITION CLASS boundary and tree condition class designation. When Collected: All trees Field width: 1 digit Tolerance: No errors MQO: At least 99% of the time Values: 1 to 9

Item 4--AK PREVIOUS TREE STATUS (p)

If not downloaded from the previous inventory, record PREVIOUS TREE STATUS for each remeasured tally tree. This code is used to track the status of sample trees over time. This information is needed to correctly assign volume information to the proper component of volume change. When Collected: On remeasurement plots (PNW Plot Kind = 2), downloaded for all previously tallied trees ≥ 1.0 in DBH Field width: 1 digit Tolerance; No errors MQO: At least 95% of the time Values:

1 Live Tree Alive at previous inventory 2 Dead Tree standing dead tree at the previous inventory

Item 5--PNW PRESENT TREE STATUS (S)

Record a current PRESENT TREE STATUS for each tallied tree; this code is used to track the status of sample trees over time: as they first appear, as ingrowth, as they survive, and when they die or are removed. This information is needed to correctly assign volume information to the proper component of volume change. When collected: All new live tally trees > 1.0 inches d.b.h., All new dead tally trees ≥ 5.0 inches d.b.h. witness only trees and non-tree witnesses On remeasurement plots, all previously tallied trees

Page 108: FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF …€¦ · 07/11/2011  · FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF COASTAL ALASKA 2009 Forest Inventory and Analysis Program

Annual Inventory 2009 VIII. TREE AND SAPLING DATA

100

Field width: 1 digit Tolerance: No errors MQO: At least 99% of time Values: Code TREE

STATUS Description

0 No Status

Remeasurement plots only. Tree is not presently in the sample. Tree was incorrectly tallied at the previous inventory or currently is not tallied due to definition or procedural change, or is not tallied due to natural causes. Requires RECONCILE code=5-9

1 Live Tree Live tree (new, remeasured or ingrowth)

2 Dead Tree

Any dead tree (new, remeasured or ingrowth) regardless of cause of death Includes all previously standing dead trees that no longer qualify as standing dead, as well as trees killed by silvicultural or land clearing activity, and are assumed not to have been utilized.. Stumps meeting size and lean criteria are tallied as dead trees.

3 Removed

Remeasurement plots only. Tree that has been cut or removed by direct human activity related to harvesting, silvicultural activity or land clearing. The tree is assumed to have been utilized.

8 Witness Non-Tally Tree

A non-tally live or dead tree that is to be used for a subplot witness.

9 Witness-Other A witness that is not a tree. It may be a shrub, rock, stump, or other; notes are required to describe the witness.

N No Live Tally Used for each condition class without live tally trees (TREE STATUS 1)

NOTE: Certain tree re-measurement situations involving PRESENT TREE STATUS, STANDING DEAD, and RECONCILE need to be clarified and understood by all field going personnel: -When a dead tree falls down, or otherwise does not qualify as a tree to be measured (see STANDING DEAD tree requirements page 101), regardless of PREVIOUS TREE STATUS, code the tree as follows: PRESENT TREE STATUS = 2 (dead), STANDING DEAD = 0 (no longer qualifies as Standing Dead), RECONCILE and any other variables are not required (notes will be available if needed). - For live subplot trees that shrink to become live saplings on the microplot, crews must collect new AZIMUTH and HORIZONTAL DISTANCE information from the microplot center.

NOTE: Using stumps as witnesses:

If you use a stump (LESS THAN 4.5’ TALL) to witness a subplot, code it as a 9 in the ‘present tree status’ field. Put “stump” in the tree notes along with the diameter and species of the stump. Measure the diameter by wrapping dbh tape around the top of the stump or, if the stump isn’t round, take two measurements across the top of the stump and average

Page 109: FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF …€¦ · 07/11/2011  · FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF COASTAL ALASKA 2009 Forest Inventory and Analysis Program

Annual Inventory 2009 VIII. TREE AND SAPLING DATA

101

them (see page 112 in the P3 manual for an illustration). Nail a square tag or yellow round (depending on the subplot) at the base facing center and one on top with a side bent up facing the direction you expect the future crew to arrive from.

Item 6--PNW Subplot Tally Tree Witness Flag

Use this flag to mark the current tally tree (live or dead) as a witness. To activate the flag press the “w” key (this should display a w next to PRESENT TREE STATUS). To turn the witness flag off (when you do not want the current record as a witness) then hit the “w” key again. When collected: When PRESENT TREE STATUS = 1 or 2, and the tally tree is chosen by the crew to be a subplot witness Field width: 1 Tolerance: No errors MQO: At least 95% of the time Values:

Code Description no mark current record is not a tally tree witness w current record is a tally tree witness

Item 7--AK STANDING DEAD

Record the code that describes whether the tree qualifies as standing dead or not. To qualify as a standing dead tally tree, dead trees must be at least 5.0 inches in diameter, have a bole which has an unbroken ACTUAL LENGTH of at least 4.5 feet, and lean less than 45 degrees from vertical as measured from the base of the tree to 4.5 feet. “Unbroken” is defined as at least 50 percent attached to the original source of growth. The degree of lean on dead trees with partially separated (i.e., 1 to 50 percent) boles is measured from the base of the tree to the top of ACTUAL LENGTH. Portions of boles on dead trees that are separated greater than 50 percent (either above or below 4.5 feet), are considered severed and are included in Down Woody Materials (DWM) if they otherwise meet DWM tally criteria. Live and dead standing tally trees, and partially separated boles of dead tally trees, do not have to be self-supported. They may be supported by other trees, branches, or their crown. When collected: All dead tally trees (PRESENT TREE STATUS = 2) Field width: 1 digit Tolerance: No errors MQO: At least 99% of the time Values:

0 No - tree does not qualify as standing dead 1 Yes - tree does qualify as standing dead

Page 110: FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF …€¦ · 07/11/2011  · FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF COASTAL ALASKA 2009 Forest Inventory and Analysis Program

Annual Inventory 2009 VIII. TREE AND SAPLING DATA

102

Item 8--AK RECONCILE (I)

For remeasurement locations only, record a RECONCILE code for any new tally tree that was not tallied in the previous inventory, and for all no status remeasurement trees (PRESENT TREE STATUS=0). This code is used to identify the reason a new tree appeared in the inventory, and identify the reason a remeasurement tree no longer qualifies as a tally tree. This information is needed to correctly assign volume information to the proper component of volume change. When Collected: On PNW Plot Kind=2; all new live tally trees 1.0 in DBH (PRESENT TREE STATUS = 1 and no PREVIOUS TREE STATUS), all new dead tally trees 5.0 in (PRESENT TREE STATUS = 2 and no PREVIOUS TREE STATUS), all no status trees (PRESENT TREE STATUS=0) Field width: 2 digits Tolerance: No errors MQO: At least 95% of the time Values:

Codes 1-4 and 10 are valid for new trees on the plot: 1 Ingrowth or reversions – either a new tally tree not qualifying as through growth or

a new tree on land that was formerly nonforest and now qualifies as forest land

Page 111: FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF …€¦ · 07/11/2011  · FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF COASTAL ALASKA 2009 Forest Inventory and Analysis Program

Annual Inventory 2009 VIII. TREE AND SAPLING DATA

103

(reversion or encroachment). 2 Through growth – new tally tree 5 inches DBH and larger, within the microplot,

which was not missed at the previous inventory. 3 Missed live – a live tree missed at previous inventory and that is live or dead now. 4 Missed dead – a dead tree missed at previous inventory and that is dead or

removed now. 10 Procedural change – A tree not tallied at the previous inventory, but is now

included in the tree tally due to a definition or procedural change.

Codes 5-9 are valid for remeasured trees that no longer qualify as tally: 5 Shrank – live tree that shrank below threshold diameter on microplot/subplot 6 Missing (moved) – tree was tallied in previous inventory, but has now moved

beyond the radius of the plot due to natural causes (i.e., small earth movement, landslide, fire, etc.). Tree must be either live before and still alive now or dead before and dead now. If tree was live before and now dead, this is a mortality tree and should have PRESENT TREE STATUS = 2 (not 0).

7 Cruiser error – erroneously tallied at previous inventory 8 Procedural change – tree was tallied at the previous inventory, but is no longer

tallied due to a definition or procedural change 9 Tree was sampled before, but now the area where the tree was located is

nonsampled. All trees on the nonsampled area have RECONCILE = 9

Code 5 is used to indicate live trees that shrink below the diameter threshold on the microplot/subplot. For example, if a live remeasurement tree shrinks below the 5.0 inch DBH on the subplot, then record the following combination of codes: PREVIOUS TREE STATUS = 1, PRESENT TREE STATUS = 0, RECONCILE = 5. If a live measured tree shrinks below the 5.0 inch threshold on the subplot and is currently greater than or equal to 1.0 inch on the microplot, then record PREVIOUS TREE STATUS = 1, PRESENT TREE STATUS = 1. Record all required items for a tally sapling.

Item 9--AK Previous Species (sPc)

When visiting previously installed plots (PNW PLOT KIND = 2), all of the previous species calls in the tree record will be downloaded into the current SPECIES field. The previous code will aid in tree reconciliation and will help correct any errors made in the previous visit. If there is an obvious error in the species call, then feel free to correct it with the values given under SPECIES below. If the downloaded species appears to be correct then move on to the next Item (previous azimuth in the AZIMUTH field). When collected: PNW PLOT KIND = 2, All trees, previous visit call will be downloaded and needs to be checked for obvious errors Field width: 3 digits Tolerance: No errors MQO: At least 99% of the time for genus, at least 95% of the time for species Values: See SPECIES code table below

Item 10--SPECIES (sPc)

Record the appropriate SPECIES code from the list provided. If you encounter a species not listed and are not sure if it should be tallied as a tree, consult your Crew Leader/Unit

Page 112: FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF …€¦ · 07/11/2011  · FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF COASTAL ALASKA 2009 Forest Inventory and Analysis Program

Annual Inventory 2009 VIII. TREE AND SAPLING DATA

104

Coordinator. If the species cannot be determined in the field, tally the tree, but bring branch samples, foliage, cones, flowers, bark, etc. to your supervisor for identification. If possible, collect samples outside the subplots from similar specimens and make a note to correct the SPECIES code later. Use code 0299 for unknown dead conifer and 0998 for unknown dead hardwood when the genus or species codes cannot be used. The generic code should only be used when you are sure the species is on the species list, but you cannot differentiate among acceptable species. This is often the case with standing dead trees on newly established plots. In this case use the sample collections procedures described earlier in this paragraph. When Collected: All live tally trees ≥ 1.0 in d.b.h. and standing dead tally trees ≥ 5.0 in d.b.h. all witnesses unless AK subplot witness flag = + Field width: 3 digits Tolerance: No errors MQO: At least 99% of the time for genus, at least 95% of the time for species

Values: CODE SPECIES CODE SPECIES 011 Pacific silver fir 242 western redcedar 019 subalpine fir 263 western hemlock 042 Alaska yellow-cedar 264 mountain hemlock 071 tamarack (native) (u) 351 red alder 094 white spruce 375 paper birch 095 black spruce 661 Oregon crabapple (u) 098 sitka spruce 746 quaking aspen 108 lodgepole pine 747 black cottonwood 231 Pacific yew (u)

(u) = uncommon Item 11--AK Previous Azimuth (aZm)

When visiting previously installed plots (PNW PLOT KIND = 2), all of the previous azimuth calls in the tree record will be downloaded into the current AZIMUTH field. The previous code will aid in tree reconciliation and will help correct any errors made in the previous visit. If there is an obvious error in the azimuth call, then feel free to correct it with the values given under AZIMUTH below. If the downloaded azimuth appears to be correct then move on to the next Item (previous distance in the HORIZONTAL DISTANCE field). When collected: PNW PLOT KIND = 2, All trees, previous visit call will be downloaded and needs to be checked for obvious errors Field width 3 digits Tolerance: +/- 10 degrees MQO: At least 90% of the time Values: 001 to 360

NOTE: In the previous inventory, azimuth was measured to the center of bole at dbh. This inventory measures azimuth to the center of bole at the base (ground) of the tree. Make sure that previous azimuths match current methods for all new and remeasured trees/saplings.

Page 113: FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF …€¦ · 07/11/2011  · FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF COASTAL ALASKA 2009 Forest Inventory and Analysis Program

Annual Inventory 2009 VIII. TREE AND SAPLING DATA

105

Item 12--AZIMUTH (aZm) Record the AZIMUTH from the subplot center (for trees ≥ 5.0 inches d.b.h.) or the microplot center (trees ≥1.0 inch and < 5.0 inches d.b.h.), sight the center of the base of each tree with a compass. Record AZIMUTH to the nearest degree. Use 360 for north. Note: For microplot trees (saplings) which become trees (at the time of plot remeasurement), crews must collect new azimuth and distance information from the subplot center. When Collected: All live tally trees ≥ 1.0 in d.b.h. and standing dead tally trees ≥ 5.0 in d.b.h., all witnesses Field width: 3 digits Tolerance: +/- 10 degrees MQO: At least 90% of time Values: 001 to 360

DISTANCE and AZIMUTH to Pistol Butt Trees When dealing with pistol butt trees it is important to measure the distance and azimuth to a consistent point on the bole. Therefore, all distances and azimuths are to be measured to the pith of the bole where pith first enters the ground (see figures below as a guide).

Pistol butt on sloped ground Krummholz situation Pistol butt on flat ground Item 13--AK Previous Horizontal Distance (Hdis)

When visiting previously installed plots (PNW PLOT KIND = 2), all of the previous horizontal distance calls in the tree record will be downloaded into the current HORIZONTAL DISTANCE field. The previous code will aid in tree reconciliation and will help correct any errors made in the previous visit. If there is an obvious error in the horizontal distance call, then feel free to correct it with the values given under HORIZONTAL DISTANCE below. If the downloaded horizontal distance appears to be correct then move on to the next Item. NOTE: Previous (periodic) methods for Horizontal Distance required the center of the tree bole at dbh be at or within the fixed plot radius. Current methods require the measurement at

Page 114: FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF …€¦ · 07/11/2011  · FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF COASTAL ALASKA 2009 Forest Inventory and Analysis Program

Annual Inventory 2009 VIII. TREE AND SAPLING DATA

106

the center of the tree bole at the base (ground). Be aware that old distances may be “off”, requiring accurate measurements using the new methodology. When collected: PNW PLOT KIND = 2, All trees, previous visit call will be downloaded and needs to be checked for obvious errors Field width: 3 digits (xx.y) Tolerance: Microplot: +/- 0.2 ft Subplot: +/- 1.0 ft MQO: At least 90% of the time Values: Microplot: 00.1 to 06.8 Subplot: 00.1 to 24.0

Item 14--HORIZONTAL DISTANCE (Hdis)

Record the measured HORIZONTAL DISTANCE, to the nearest 0.1 foot, from the subplot center (for trees ≥ 5.0 inches d.b.h.) or microplot center (for trees ≥ 1.0 inch and < 5.0 inches d.b.h.) to the pith of the tree at the base. When Collected: All live tally trees ≥ 1.0 in d.b.h. and standing dead tally trees ≥ 5.0 in d.b.h. Field width: 3 digits (xx.y) Tolerance: Microplot: +/- 0.2 ft Subplot: +/- 1.0 ft MQO: At least 90% of the time Values: Microplot: 00.1 to 06.8 Subplot: 00.1 to 24.0

Item 15--PNW Slope Distance to Witness Tree or Object (sdi)

Record the slope distance, to the nearest 0.1 foot, from where the subplot center pin enters the ground, to the head of the nail that affixes the aluminum round/tag at the base of the witness tree (or, to the face of the object selected as a witness-explain in tree notes). When collected: All witnesses Field width: 3 digits (xx.y) Tolerance: +/- 0.2 feet MQO: At least 90 % of the time Values: 00.1 to 99.9

Item 16--AK Previous Diameter at Breast Height (pdia)

This is the DBH assigned by the field crew during the previous visit (converted from metric to English). It has been downloaded from the previous inventory and will not be editable by the current field crew. This variable is provided to aid in tree reconciliation and to account for any possible errors made in the previous visit. When collected: When PNW PLOT KIND = 2, All downloaded live tally trees/saplings ≥ 1.0 inch d.b.h., all downloaded standing dead tally trees Field width: 4 digits Tolerance: N/A MQO: N/A Values: 001.0 to 999.9

Page 115: FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF …€¦ · 07/11/2011  · FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF COASTAL ALASKA 2009 Forest Inventory and Analysis Program

Annual Inventory 2009 VIII. TREE AND SAPLING DATA

107

Item 17--DIAMETER (Diam)

Diameters are measured at breast height (4.5 feet above ground line on the uphill side of the tree). Trees with diameters ≥ 1.0 inch and < 5.0 inches are measured on the 6.8 foot radius microplot, those with diameters of ≥ 5.0 inches are measured on the 24 foot radius subplots.

Diameters are used in calculating volume, growth, average stand diameter, and stocking-related estimates such as forest type and stand size. On trees where the root collar is above ground level, DBH should be taken 4.5’ up the bole from the highest point of the root collar. NOTE: when measuring diameter with the dbh tape, if the measurement falls between two 1/10th inch marks on the tape, always record to the smallest (lowest) mark…don’t round up!! Marking Current Diameter:

Marking d.b.h. on trees previously marked: The place where diameter was measured at the previous visit on trees tallied live and ≥ 3.0 in. d.b.h. was marked with an aluminum nail. On these trees, remeasure diameter at the location of the previous crew’s nail if appropriate using the rules below (under DIAMETER AT BREAST HEIGHT). Reset the old nail enough so that as much of the old nail is exposed as possible. If the old nail cannot be pulled out to meet this requirement, set a new nail at the same location. If the previous location is no longer accessible (i.e. covered in a landslide), there is an abnormality at the previous DIAMETER measurement point, or it is more than 12 inches away from where the diameter should be measured according to current protocols (either because protocols have changed or the previous crew made a mistake) move the point of measurement and assign a DIAMETER CHECK code of 2. If the old nail marks a point of diameter measurement not used at the current inventory, remove it if possible; otherwise pound it in flush with the tree. NOTE: If the previous nail falls within the range of tolerance outlined above, do not pull it out of the tree just because it is not facing the subplot center. Keep original placement of nails at all times unless there is obvious error (see tolerances above), place a new nail at the old if it cannot be pulled out and is in danger of being completely swallowed before the next re-visit (10 yrs). Marking trees ≥ 3.0 in. d.b.h., or snags ≥ 5.0 in. d.b.h., tallied for the first time: Set an aluminum nail at the point of diameter measurement. On level ground, place the nail on the side of the tree facing the subplot/microplot center. On a steep slope, place the nail on the uphill side of the bole. Leave as much of the nail exposed as possible, but be sure it is firmly affixed to the tree. Use caution to avoid damaging trees with nails (i.e. hitting bole with axe while hammering). Do not nail trees less than 3.0 inches in diameter.

Page 116: FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF …€¦ · 07/11/2011  · FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF COASTAL ALASKA 2009 Forest Inventory and Analysis Program

Annual Inventory 2009 VIII. TREE AND SAPLING DATA

108

When Collected: All live tally trees > 1.0 in d.b.h., all standing dead tally trees > 5.0 in d.b.h., AK subplot witness flag = W, or PRESENT TREE STATUS = 8 Field width: 4 digits (xxx.y) Tolerance: Live trees, and dead trees with Decay Class 1, 2: +/- 0.1 in. per 20.0 in increment of measured diameter. A tree with a diameter of 41.0 in would have a tolerance of +/- 0.3 in. Dead trees with Decay Class 3, 4, 5: +/- 1.0 in. per 20.0 in increment of measured diameter. MQO: At least 95% of the time Values: 001.0 to 999.9 DIAMETER AT BREAST HEIGHT (DBH) Unless one of the following special situations is encountered, measure DBH at 4.5 ft above the ground line on the uphill side of the tree. Round each measurement down to the last 0.1 inch. For example, a reading of 3.68 inches is recorded as 3.6 inches. Special DBH situations: 1. Forked tree: In order to qualify as a fork, the stem in question must be at least 1/3 the diameter of the main stem and must branch out from the main stem at an angle of 45 degrees or less. Forks originate at the point on the bole where the piths intersect. Forked trees are handled differently depending on whether the fork originates below 1.0 foot, between 1.0 and 4.5 feet, or above 4.5 feet. o Trees forked below 1.0 foot. Trees forked in this region

are treated as distinctly separate trees. Distances and azimuths are measured individually to the center of each stem where it splits from the stump. DBH is measured for each stem at 4.5 feet above the ground. When stems originate from pith intersections below 1 foot, it is possible for some stems to be within the limiting distance of the microplot or subplot, and others to be beyond the limiting distance. If stems originating from forks that occur below 1.0 foot fork again between 1.0 and 4.5 feet, the rules in the next paragraph apply.

o Trees forked between 1.0 foot and 4.5 feet. Trees forked in this region are also counted as separate trees, but only one distance and azimuth (to the central stump) is used for all. Although a single azimuth and distance applies to all, multiple stems should be recorded as they occur in clockwise order (from front to back when one stem is directly in front of another). The DBH of each fork is measured at a point 3.5 feet above the pith intersection. When forks originate from pith intersections between 1.0 and 4.5 feet, the limiting distance is the same for all forks--they are either all on, or all off the plot.

Page 117: FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF …€¦ · 07/11/2011  · FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF COASTAL ALASKA 2009 Forest Inventory and Analysis Program

Annual Inventory 2009 VIII. TREE AND SAPLING DATA

109

Multiple forks are possible if they all originate from approximately the same point on the main stem. In such cases, measure DBH on all stems at 3.5 feet above the common pith intersection. Once a stem is tallied as a fork that originated from a pith intersection between 1.0 and 4.5 feet, do not recognize any additional forks that may occur on that stem. Measure the diameter of such stems below the base of stem separation (i.e., do not move the point of diameter the entire 3.5 feet above the first fork). o Trees forked at or above 4.5 feet. Trees forked in

this region count as one single tree. If a fork occurs at or immediately above 4.5 feet, measure diameter below the fork just beneath any swelling that would inflate DBH.

2. Stump Sprouts. Stump sprouts originate between ground level and 4.5 feet on the boles of trees that have died or been cut. Stump sprouts are handled the same as forked trees, with the exception that stump sprouts are not required to be 1/3 the diameter of the dead bole. Stump sprouts originating below 1.0 foot are measured at 4.5 feet from ground line. Stump sprouts originating between 1.0 foot and 4.5 feet are measured at 3.5 foot above their point of occurrence. As with forks, rules for measuring distance and azimuth depend on whether the sprouts originate above or below 1.0 foot. 3. Tree with butt-swell or bottleneck: Measure these trees 1.5 feet above the end of the swell or bottleneck if the swell or bottleneck extends 3.0 feet or more above the ground. 4. Tree with irregularities at DBH: On trees with swellings, bumps, depressions, and branches at DBH, diameter will be measured immediately above the irregularity at the place it ceases to affect normal stem form.

4.5’

Diameter P i t

Pith intersection

4.5’

Diameter point

4.5’

Diameter point

Page 118: FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF …€¦ · 07/11/2011  · FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF COASTAL ALASKA 2009 Forest Inventory and Analysis Program

Annual Inventory 2009 VIII. TREE AND SAPLING DATA

110

5. Tree on slope: Measure diameter at 4.5 feet from the ground along the bole on the uphill side of the tree. 6. Leaning tree: Measure diameter at 4.5 feet from the ground along the bole. The 4.5 foot distance is measured along the underside face of the bole. 7. Turpentine tree: On trees with turpentine face extending above 4.5 feet, estimate the diameter at 10.0 feet above the ground and multiply by 1.1 to estimate DBH outside bark. 8. Independent trees that grow together: If two or more independent stems have grown together at or above the point of DBH, continue to treat them as separate trees. Estimate the diameter of each, set the “DIAMETER CHECK” code to 1, and explain the situation in the notes. 9. Missing wood or bark. Do not reconstruct the DBH of a tree that is missing wood or bark or at the point of measurement. Record the diameter, to the nearest 0.1 inch, of the wood and bark that is still attached to the tree. If a tree has a localized abnormality (gouge, depression, etc.) at the point of point of DBH, apply the procedure described for trees with irregularities at DBH. 10. Live wind thrown tree: Measure from the top of the root collar along the length to 4.5 feet.

4.5’

4.5’

4.5’Root Collar

Page 119: FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF …€¦ · 07/11/2011  · FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF COASTAL ALASKA 2009 Forest Inventory and Analysis Program

Annual Inventory 2009 VIII. TREE AND SAPLING DATA

111

11. Down live tree with tree-form branches growing vertical from main bole. When a down live tree, touching the ground, has vertical (less than 45 degrees from vertical) tree-like branches coming off the main bole, first determine whether or not the pith of the main bole (averaged along the first log of the tree) is above or below the duff layer. Duff consists of decomposing leaves and other organic material. You should see no recognizable plant parts; the duff layer is usually dark decomposed organic matter. When moss is present, the top of the duff layer is just below the green portion of the moss. The bottom of this layer is the point where mineral soil (A horizon) begins. o If the pith of the main bole is above the duff layer, use the same forking rules specified

for a forked tree, and take all measurements accordingly (figure below).

o If the pith intersection of the main down bole and vertical tree-like branch occurs below 4.5feet from the stump along the main bole, treat that branch as a separate tree, and measure DBH 3.5‘ above the pith intersection for both the main bole and the tree-like branch (figure below).

Down tree above duff

o If the intersection between the main down bole and the tree-like branch occurs beyond

the 4.5foot point from the stump along the main bole, treat that branch as part of the main down bole (figure above).

o If the pith of main tree bole is below the duff layer, ignore the main bole, and treat each tree-like branch as a separate tree; take DBH and length measurements from the ground, not necessarily from the top of the down bole (figure below). However, if the top of the main tree bole curves out of the ground towards a vertical angle, treat that portion of that top as an individual tree originating where the pith leaves the duff layer.

Down tree below duff

Page 120: FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF …€¦ · 07/11/2011  · FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF COASTAL ALASKA 2009 Forest Inventory and Analysis Program

Annual Inventory 2009 VIII. TREE AND SAPLING DATA

112

12. Tree with curved bole (pistol butt tree): Measure along the bole on the uphill side (upper surface) of the tree. 13. Diameter on stump (for witness): Use a logger's tape, cloth tape or ruler to measure the longest and shortest axis across the top of the stump. Record diameter as the average of the two measurements.

Item 18--AK DIAMETER CHECK (c)

Record this code to identify any irregularities in diameter measurement positions (i.e. abnormal swellings, diseases, damage, new measurement positions, etc.) that may affect use of this tree in diameter growth/change analyses. If diameter at the current inventory is measured at a different location than at the previous inventory (due to one of the reasons shown under Item 16--DIAMETER above), record DIAMETER CHECK=2 and remove the d-nail(s) from the previous inventory. NOTE: If the previous point of diameter measurement cannot be found on a live tree (i.e. nail fell out) also record code 2. If diameter is BOTH estimated and moved, also use code 2. When Collected: All live tally trees ≥ 1.0 in d.b.h. and standing dead tally trees ≥ 5.0 in d.b.h. Field width: 1 digit Tolerance: No errors MQO: At least 99% of time Values:

Code Diameter check 0 Diameter measured accurately 1 Diameter estimated

2 Diameter measured at different location than previous measurement (remove original d-nail)

Item 19--PNW 10-Yr Increment (Inc)

A 3-digit code recording bored radial increment inside the bark to the nearest 1/20th inch for a 10-year period. 10-YR INC is recorded for the first live growing stock tree in each 2-inch dbh class (ex. 6-inch class = 5.0” – 6.9”) and species combination on new plots and for all new trees on remeasurement plots unless tree is an aspen, birch or cottonwood less than 12” dbh (sensitive species which will not be cored). To see a chart tracking trees still needed by size class do the following: push ctrl + Z, in the Utility menu select the “Tree DBH/Species Report”. To obtain radial increment:

Page 121: FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF …€¦ · 07/11/2011  · FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF COASTAL ALASKA 2009 Forest Inventory and Analysis Program

Annual Inventory 2009 VIII. TREE AND SAPLING DATA

113

Bore the tree just below the point of diameter measurement (to avoid impacting the diameter measurement) on the same side of the tree facing the point. If tree is on a steep slope, bore for age on the uphill side. Count back 10 growth rings from the cambium end of the core starting from the first fully-formed ring (and skipping this year’s summer growth) (see figure below). Measure the length of this segment of the core to the nearest 1/20th of an inch to get radial increment. Enter this radial increment as the number of twentieths. E.g. 18/20 is recorded as “18” and 27/20 is recorded “27”.

The cambium is often pinkish in color with a squishy, moist, corklike texture. The current year’s unfinished growth is usually very light colored.

When collected: All tree species EXCEPT aspen, birch or cottonwood < 12”. Live tally trees ≥ 5 inches dbh, on all new plots (PNW PLOT KIND = 1 or 5, PRESENT TREE STATUS = 1); live tally trees ≥ 5 inches dbh, on previously measured plots, that were missed, ingrowth, or through-growth (trees on plots where PNW PLOT KIND = 2, PRESENT TREE STATUS = 1 and RECONCILE = 1, 2, or 3.) For aspen, birch or cottonwood - Live tally trees ≥ 12 inches dbh, on all new plots (PNW PLOT KIND = 1 or 5, PRESENT TREE STATUS = 1); live tally trees ≥ 12 inches dbh, on previously measured plots, that were missed, ingrowth, or through-growth (trees on plots where PNW PLOT KIND = 2, PRESENT TREE STATUS = 1 and RECONCILE = 1, 2, or 3.) Field width: 3 digits Tolerance: +/- 1/20 per 1 inch of increment MQO: At least 90% of the time Values: 1 to 999

Item 20--ACTUAL LENGTH (alE)

For trees with missing tops (top on live trees is completely detached; top on dead trees is greater than 50 percent detached from the tree). Record the ACTUAL LENGTH of the tree to the nearest 1.0 foot from ground level to the break. Use the length to the break for ACTUAL LENGTH until a new leader qualifies as the new top for TOTAL LENGTH; until that occurs, continue to record ACTUAL LENGTH to the break. Trees with previously broken tops are considered recovered (i.e., ACTUAL LENGTH = TOTAL LENGTH) when a new leader is 1/3 the diameter of the broken top at the point where the top was broken (not where the new leader originates from the trunk). ACTUAL LENGTH is the length of the bole, not the vertical height and should only differ from TOTAL LENGTH if the tree has a broken or missing top.

Page 122: FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF …€¦ · 07/11/2011  · FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF COASTAL ALASKA 2009 Forest Inventory and Analysis Program

Annual Inventory 2009 VIII. TREE AND SAPLING DATA

114

When Collected: All live and standing dead tally trees ≥ 1.0 in DBH Field width: 3 digits Tolerance: +/- 10% of true length MQO: At least 90% of the time Values: 005 to 400

Item 21--AK LENGTH METHOD

Record the code that indicates the method used to determine tree lengths. When Collected: All live tally trees ≥ 1.0 in. d.b.h., and all standing dead tally trees ≥ 5.0 in d.b.h. Field width: 1 digit Tolerance: No errors MQO: At least 99% of time Values: Data Recorder Code

Length Method

B Actual and total lengths are field measured with a measurement instrument (e.g., laser, clinometer, relascope, taping complete pieces that have recently fallen and adding to actual length)

A Actual length is measured with an instrument, total length is visually estimated

N Actual and total lengths are visually estimated (not measured). Item 22--PNW Previous Length

This is the tree length measured by the field crew during the periodic visit (converted from metric to English units). It has been downloaded from the periodic inventory and will not be editable by the current field crew. This data is provided to help ensure quality of tree length data through comparison of the periodic length versus the currently measured length, and to assist in estimation of current tree length, if estimation is necessary due to lean, dead top, etc. When collected: When PNW Plot Kind = 2, All DOWNLOADED live tally trees/saplings = 1.0 inch d.b.h. where tree was measured in periodic inventory (not estimated), all downloaded standing dead tally trees where tree was measured in periodic inventory (not estimated). Field width: 3 digits Tolerance: NA MQO: NA Values: 005 to 400

Item 23--TOTAL LENGTH (tLe)

Record the TOTAL LENGTH of the tree, to the nearest 1.0 ft from ground level to the top of the tree. For trees growing on a slope, measure on the uphill side of the tree. If the tree has a missing top (top is broken and completely detached from the tree), estimate what the total length would be if there were no missing top. Dead, crooked, or forked tops do not affect TOTAL LENGTH. When Collected: All live tally trees ≥ 1.0 in. d.b.h. and, all standing dead tally trees ≥ 5.0 in. d.b.h.

Page 123: FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF …€¦ · 07/11/2011  · FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF COASTAL ALASKA 2009 Forest Inventory and Analysis Program

Annual Inventory 2009 VIII. TREE AND SAPLING DATA

115

Field width: 3 digits Tolerance: +/- 10% of true length MQO: At least 90% of the time Values: 005 to 400

Item 24--COMPACTED CROWN RATIO (cR)

Record the COMPACTED CROWN RATIO for each live tally tree, 1.0 in and larger to the nearest 1 percent. COMPACTED CROWN RATIO is that portion of the tree supporting live foliage (or in the case of extreme temporary defoliation, should be supporting live foliage) and is expressed as a percentage of the ACTUAL TREE LENGTH (i.e. include dead tops, but not missing tops in the ratio). To determine COMPACTED CROWN RATIO, ocularly transfer lower live branches to fill in large holes in the upper portion of the tree until a full, even crown is visualized. Try to picture the normal density of photosynthetic foliage and adjust for it (i.e. some branches may be very sparse with needles/leaves). Do not over-compact trees beyond their typical full crown situation. For example, if tree branches tend to average 2-feet between whorls, do not compact crowns any tighter than the 2-foot spacing. Include epicormic branches once they are 1” diameter.

NOTE: Crown ratio is based on the ratio of foliage, not where the limbs attach to the tree bole. Crown ratio is an indicator of a tree's vigor. In data analysis, trees with a crown ratio of 30 percent or less are considered less vigorous. For this reason, be particularly careful when deciding between codes greater or less than "30." It is preferable to use a laser or clinometer to measure live crown ratios on these trees. See figure below to get an idea of what is required to get from an uncompacted crown to a COMPACTED CROWN RATIO.

When Collected: All live tally trees ≥ 1.0 in. d.b.h. Field width: 2 digits Tolerance: +/- 10% (10% of 100) MQO: At least 80% of the time Values: 00 to 99

Compacted Crown Ratio Examples

Item 25--CROWN CLASS (c)

Rate tree crowns in relation to the sunlight received and proximity to neighboring trees. Base the assessment on the position of the crown at the time of observation. Example: a

Page 124: FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF …€¦ · 07/11/2011  · FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF COASTAL ALASKA 2009 Forest Inventory and Analysis Program

Annual Inventory 2009 VIII. TREE AND SAPLING DATA

116

formerly overtopped tree which is now dominant due to tree removal is classified as dominant.

Crown classifications are easily applied in even-aged stands. Classifications are more difficult to assign in uneven-aged stands or in plots where more than one age class is present. In these situations, classify the tree based on its immediate environment. In other words, base your classification on how much light the tree's crown is receiving, not its position in the canopy. This data item is used to predict tree growth. The intermediate and overtopped crown classes are meant to include trees seriously affected by direct competition with adjacent trees.

When Collected: All live tally trees > 1.0 in d.b.h. Field width: 1 digit Tolerance: No errors MQO: At least 85% of the time Values:

Code Crown class Definition

1 Open grown Trees with crowns that receive full light from above and from all sides throughout most of its life, particularly during its early developmental period.

2 Dominant

Trees with crown extending above the general level of the crown canopy and receiving full light from above and partly from the sides. These trees are taller than the average trees in the stand and their crowns are well developed, but they could be somewhat crowded on the sides. Also, trees whose crowns have received full light from above and from all sides during early development and most of their life. Their crown form or shape appears to be free of influence from neighboring trees.

3 Codominant

Trees with crowns at the general level of the crown canopy. Crowns receive full light from above but little direct sunlight penetrates their sides. Usually they have medium-sized crowns and are somewhat crowded from the sides. In stagnated stands, codominant trees have small-sized crowns and are crowded on the sides.

4 Intermediate

These trees are shorter than dominants and codominants, but their crowns extend into the canopy of codominant and dominant trees. They receive little direct light from above and none from the sides. As a result, intermediate trees usually have small crowns and are very crowded from the sides.

5 Overtopped Trees with crowns entirely below the general level of the crown canopy that receive no direct sunlight either from above or the sides

Item 26--ROTTEN/MISSING CULL (rc)

Record the percent rotten or missing cubic-foot cull for all live tally trees ≥ 5.0 inches DBH and all standing dead tally trees ≥ 5.0 inches DBH. Record the percentage of rotten and missing cubic-foot volume, to the nearest 1 percent. When estimating volume loss (tree cull), only consider the cull on the merchantable

Page 125: FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF …€¦ · 07/11/2011  · FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF COASTAL ALASKA 2009 Forest Inventory and Analysis Program

Annual Inventory 2009 VIII. TREE AND SAPLING DATA

117

bole/portion of the tree, from a 1-foot stump to a 4-inch top. Do not include any cull estimate above ACTUAL LENGTH. Rotten and missing volume loss is often difficult to estimate. Refer to supplemental disease and insect pests field guides and local defect guidelines as an aid in identifying damaging agents and their impact on volume loss. Use your best judgment and be alert to such defect indicators as the following:

o Cankers or fruiting bodies. o Swollen or punky knots. o Dull, hollow sound of bole (use regional standards). o Large dead limbs, especially those with frayed ends. o Sawdust around the base of the tree.

You may use insect/disease laminated flash cards as a general guide for determining the extent of rotten cull in the afflicted tree. Remember that these flash cards give board foot volume loss estimates, so use them only as a rough guide for determining cubic foot volume loss. As a general rule, only account for rotten cull that can be visibly detected such as: open bole wounds, large rotten branch stobs, fruiting bodies, etc. There is also a cubic-foot volume table included in Appendix 6 (page 159) as an aid in estimating rotten/missing cull. Do not include evidence of rot which is obtained solely by coring the tree. When Collected: All live and standing dead tally trees > 5.0 in. d.b.h. Field width: 2 digits Tolerance: +/- 10% MQO: At least 90% of the time Values: 0 to 99

Item 27--AK Tree Class (E)

Record the tree class code that best describes the general quality of the tree or sapling. Use the definitions for each of the codes provided to help in determining tree or sapling quality. If the tree is dead (PRESENT TREE STATUS = 2 and STANDING DEAD =1) then the tree must get a code 5 or 6. When collected: All live trees ≥ 5.0 inches d.b.h., all dead trees ≥ 5.0 inches d.b.h. when AK STANDING DEAD = 1, and all live saplings. Field width: 1 digit Tolerance: No errors MQO: At least 70% of the time Values: Code Description

2

Growing stock: A live sapling (1.0 - 4.9 inches dbh) with minor or no evidence of form defects, insects, or disease, that is expected to become a sound tree 5.0 inches dbh or larger with good form and vigor. A live tree, 5.0 inches dbh or larger, that has less than 75% of the merchantable volume cull, and contains at least one solid 8-foot section reasonably free from form defect , on the merchantable bole.

Page 126: FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF …€¦ · 07/11/2011  · FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF COASTAL ALASKA 2009 Forest Inventory and Analysis Program

Annual Inventory 2009 VIII. TREE AND SAPLING DATA

118

3

Rough cull: Trees that do not now, or prospectively, have at least one solid 8 foot section, reasonably free of form defect, on the merchantable bole OR have 75% or more of the merchantable volume cull: and more than half of this cull is due to sound dead wood cubic-foot loss or severe form defect volume loss.

4 Rotten cull: Trees with 75 % or more of the merchantable volume cull, and more than half of this cull is due to rotten or missing cubic-foot volume loss.

5 Hard Dead: A standing dead tree, 5.0 inch dbh or larger, that has a minimum of 25% of the original merchantable volume sound (less than 75% rotten and/or missing).

6 Soft Dead: A standing dead tree, 5.0 inch dbh or larger, that has less than 25% of the original merchantable volume sound (75% or more rotten and/or missing).

NOTE: You are not required to have 75% rotten/missing cull in order for a tree to qualify for code 4 (rotten cull). Just be sure that more than half of the total 75% merchantable volume cull is attributed to rotten/missing cull. Example: A tree has form (rough) cull and rotten cull in its merchantable bole. The total merchantable cull (combined rough and rotten) equals 80%, the rough cull is determined to make up about 65% of the entire amount (80%), thus the tree class code for the tree would be 3 (rough cull).

Item 28--DECAY CLASS (d)

Record for each standing dead tree, 5.0-inch in diameter and larger, indicating the trees stage of decay.

It is unlikely that decay class 5 will apply to a tally tree; by the time a dead tree has reached decay class 5, it will likely have toppled over or have become too short to qualify for tally.

When Collected: All standing dead tally trees > 5.0 in d.b.h. Field width: 1 digit Tolerance: +/- 1 class MQO: At least 90% of the time Values: Use the following table for guidelines:

Snag characteristics1 Decay Class (code)

Limbs and Branches

Top

% Bark Remaining

Sapwood Presence

Sapwood Condition

Heartwood Condition

1 All present Pointed 100 Intact Sound, incipient decay, hard, original color

Sound, hard, original color

2 Few limbs, no fine branches

Broken Variable Sloughing

Advanced decay, fibrous, firm to soft, light brown

Sound at base, incipient decay in outer edge of upper bole, hard, light to reddish brown

3 Limb stubs Broken Variable Sloughing Fibrous, soft, light to reddish brown

Incipient decay at base, advanced decay throughout upper bole, fibrous, hard to firm, reddish brown

Page 127: FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF …€¦ · 07/11/2011  · FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF COASTAL ALASKA 2009 Forest Inventory and Analysis Program

Annual Inventory 2009 VIII. TREE AND SAPLING DATA

119

4 Few or no stubs

Broken Variable Sloughing Cubical, soft, reddish to dark brown

Advanced decay at base, sloughing from upper bole, fibrous to cubical, soft, dark reddish brown

5 None Broken Less than 20

Gone Gone

Sloughing, cubical, soft, dark brown, OR fibrous, very soft, dark reddish brown, encased in hardened shell

1 Characteristics are for Douglas-fir. Snags for other species may vary somewhat; use this table as a guide.

Item 29--AK MORTALITY YEAR

Record the estimated year that tree died or was cut. For each tree that has died or been cut, record the 4-digit year in which the tree died. Mortality year is also recorded for trees on land that has been converted to a nonforest land use, if it can be determined that a tree died before the land was converted. When Collected: Plots where PNW PLOT KIND = 1 or 2: all PREVIOUS TREE STATUS = 1 and PRESENT TREE STATUS = 2 or 3; or PRESENT TREE STATUS = 2

and RECONCILE = 1, 2, 3, or 10. Field width: 4 digits Tolerance: +/- 1 year for remeasurement cycles of 5 years +/- 2 years for remeasurement cycles of > 5 years MQO: At least 70% of the time Values: Year of death

Item 30--AK CAUSE OF DEATH (cd)

Record a cause of death for all trees that have died or been cut since the previous survey. If on a plot for first time (PNW PLOT KIND = 1), then estimate the cause of death. If cause of death cannot be reliably estimated (usually within the last 5 years), record unknown/not sure. When Collected: When any PRESENT TREE STATUS = 2 or 3 Field width: 2 digits Tolerance: No errors MQO: At least 80% of the time Values:

Page 128: FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF …€¦ · 07/11/2011  · FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF COASTAL ALASKA 2009 Forest Inventory and Analysis Program

Annual Inventory 2009 VIII. TREE AND SAPLING DATA

120

Code CAUSE OF DEATH

10 Insect 20 Disease 30 Fire 40 Animal 50 Weather 60 Vegetation (suppression, competition, vines/kudzu)

70 Unknown/not sure/other- includes death from human activity not related to silvicultural or land clearing activity (accidental, random, etc.) Tree notes required.

80 Silvicultural or land clearing activity (death caused by harvesting or other silvicultural activity, including girdling, chaining, etc., or to land clearing activity)

Item 31--TREE NOTES

Record notes pertaining to an individual tree as called for to explain or describe another variable. TREE NOTES are available for each individual tree record and are accessible by pushing the F4 key while the cursor is anywhere on the current tree record. Note any trees where the previous dbh is in error with a note of “prevdiaerror”. This will be a keyword for analysts to look closer at these trees. When collected: All trees. Field width: 40 Tolerance: N/A MQO: N/A Values: English language words, phrases and number

Page 129: FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF …€¦ · 07/11/2011  · FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF COASTAL ALASKA 2009 Forest Inventory and Analysis Program

Annual Inventory 2009 IX. SITE TREE INFORMATION

121

IX. SITE TREE INFORMATION

Item 1--AK SITE/AGE TREE NUMBER (No)..................................................................123 Item 2--SUBPLOT NUMBER (Sb) ..................................................................................124 Item 3--AK Site/age Tree Status....................................................................................124 Item 4--AK Site/age Tree Type ......................................................................................124 Item 5--AK Questionable Site/age Tree Flag................................................................125 Item 6--CONDITION CLASS LIST (C) ............................................................................125 Item 7--AK Tally Tree Number (Trn) .............................................................................126 Item 8--AZIMUTH (Azm) .................................................................................................126 Item 9--HORIZONTAL DISTANCE (Hdst) ......................................................................126 Item 10--SPECIES (Spc) ................................................................................................126 Item 11--DIAMETER (Dbh) .............................................................................................127 Item 12--SITE TREE LENGTH (Ht).................................................................................127 Item 13--TREE AGE AT DIAMETER (Age) ....................................................................127 Item 14--AK Age Determination Method ......................................................................128 Item 15--SITE TREE NOTES ..........................................................................................129

Page 130: FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF …€¦ · 07/11/2011  · FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF COASTAL ALASKA 2009 Forest Inventory and Analysis Program

Annual Inventory 2009 IX. SITE TREE INFORMATION

122

IX. SITE TREE INFORMATION General instructions Site trees are a measure of site productivity expressed by the height to age relationship of dominant and co-dominant trees. If suitable site trees are available, site tree data are required for every accessible forest land condition class defined on a plot. An individual site tree may be used for more than one condition class where differences in condition classes are not the result of differences in site productivity. For example, when different condition classes are caused solely due to differences in RESERVED STATUS, OWNER CLASS, and/or disturbance-related differences in DENSITY (e.g., heavily thinned vs. unthinned), a site tree may be used for more than one condition class. When in doubt, do not use a site tree for more than one condition class. Selection criteria Select at least three site trees for the tree species that defines the forest type for each accessible forest land condition class. Select trees off the subplot where possible. Use only trees that have remained in a dominant or co-dominant crown position throughout their entire life span. If possible, trees should be 5.0 inches in diameter, or larger, and at least 20 years old. Ideally, site trees in the western U.S. should be between 35-80 years old. If preferred trees cannot be found in the age range, expand the age range to 15-250 years. Try to reject trees that are visibly damaged, trees with ring patterns that exhibit signs of stature suppression, trees with abnormalities at DBH, and trees with rotten cores. If there are no site trees that meet the acceptable criteria above, then select trees that match the definitions as closely as possible. This can include less desirable trees such as trees greater than 250 years old, recently dead (such as recent beetle kill), wolf, or site suppressed trees. Record the appropriate “AK questionable site/age tree” flag for those site trees not meeting the selection criteria. Do not select aspen, birch or cottonwood less than 12” dbh (sensitive species) unless they are outside the subplot boundary. Note: For Re-measurement Plots: if the forest type has changed from the initial visit, collect additional site/age trees as needed so that, including previously measured site/age trees, three site/age trees have been collected for each forest type species. Previous site/age trees will be downloaded into the data recorder, plus they will be printed on data sheets included in the plot folder. Also: If there is a change in the numbering of condition classes from the previous visit, it is important that “old” site/age trees have their CONDITION CLASS LIST updated to reflect the changes. Example: previous field visit had CC 1 = forest and CC 2 = nonforest, current visit reverses the numbers due to a procedural change or correction of previous errors (the condition class numbers are switched to correct, CC1=nonforest, CC2=forest) then the “old” site/age trees would need a change in CONDITION CLASS LIST from 1 to 2. Site trees should be selected in the following order of preference: 1st Choice: representative of the stand, on the list below. 2nd Choice: not representative of the stand, any suitable tree on the list below Note: in Alaska “representative of the stand” means a species that defines the forest type.

Page 131: FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF …€¦ · 07/11/2011  · FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF COASTAL ALASKA 2009 Forest Inventory and Analysis Program

Annual Inventory 2009 IX. SITE TREE INFORMATION

123

Species Code

Common Name Associated Forest Type Code

-------------------- Alaska Softwood Species -------------------- 011 Pacific silver fir 264 019 subalpine fir 268 042 Alaska yellow-cedar 271 094 white spruce 122 095 black spruce 125 098 Sitka spruce 305 108 lodgepole pine 281 242 western redcedar 304 263 western hemlock 301 264 mountain hemlock 270

-------------------- Alaska Hardwood Species -------------------- 351 red alder 911 375 paper birch 902 746 quaking aspen 901 747 black cottonwood 703

When Collected: New plots: all accessible forest conditions on new plots Remeasurement plots: When forest type changes from initial visit OR site/age trees from previous visit do not meet selection criteria and acceptable site/age trees can be found OR < 3 site/age trees of appropriate species were recorded during the previous visit and acceptable site/age trees (for a total of 3 per condition) can be found. Alaska age tree selection Select three live age trees per accessible forested condition. Each tree should represent plurality (majority) of the predominant STAND SIZE CLASS of the condition. In uneven aged stands, use the tree age that represents plurality of tree composition in the stand. Age trees are used to compute stand age for any sampled accessible forest land conditions. Do not select aspen, birch or cottonwood less than 12” dbh (sensitive species) unless they are outside the subplot boundary. Alaska Remeasurement Plots: if the forest type has changed from the initial visit, collect additional age trees as needed so that, including previously measured age trees, a total of three age trees exist for each accessible forest condition. Item 1--AK SITE/AGE TREE NUMBER (No)

Automatically records a code indicating the assigned number for each site/age tree record on a plot. Numbers will be pre-assigned to downloaded/printed site trees. The data recorder will automatically assign a number to each new site/age tree (in sequential order).

Page 132: FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF …€¦ · 07/11/2011  · FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF COASTAL ALASKA 2009 Forest Inventory and Analysis Program

Annual Inventory 2009 IX. SITE TREE INFORMATION

124

When collected: Previous visit site/age trees downloaded, new site/age trees number entered automatically in sequential order. Field width: 2 Tolerance: No errors MQO: 100% of the time Values: 01 - 99

Item 2--SUBPLOT NUMBER (Sb) Record the subplot number to which the site/age tree is referenced. Record a 1 digit code indicating the number of the subplot on which a site/age tree is on or near. Subplot numbers for site/age trees previously collected will be downloaded/printed if on file. When Collected: All site/age trees Field width: 1 digit Tolerance: No errors MQO: At least 99% of the time Values:

Code Description 1 Center subplot 2 North subplot 3 Southeast subplot 4 Southwest subplot

Item 3--AK Site/age Tree Status

This variable is used to determine if this site/age tree is old “O”, new “N”, or invalid old “I”. If the site/age has been downloaded from the previous visit, then an “O” will be displayed next to the subplot number. If the site/age is new “N” then it has been copied from a tree record or entered manually (as a non-tally site tree). If an old site/age tree (“O”) is determined to be previously collected in error, or a crew does not feel it best represents the forest condition and can replace it with a better representative tree, then change the site/age tree status code from “O” to “I”. When collected: downloaded tree records will automatically get status of “O”. New tree records will get status of “N”. Field width: 1 Tolerance: No errors MQO: At least 99% of the time Values: Code Description

N New site/age tree copied from current tree tally or entered manually as non-tally tree

O Old site/age tree downloaded from previous plot visit)

I Invalid “Old” site/age tree

only to be used for procedural differences or previous crew selection error or if better stand representative site/age trees are now available

Item 4--AK Site/age Tree Type

Record the appropriate type of site, age, or combination that this tree record represents.

Page 133: FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF …€¦ · 07/11/2011  · FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF COASTAL ALASKA 2009 Forest Inventory and Analysis Program

Annual Inventory 2009 IX. SITE TREE INFORMATION

125

When collected: All site/age trees Field width: 1 Tolerance: no errors MQO: at least 95% of the time Values:

Code Definition 1 Site tree 2 Age tree 3 Site and Age tree

Item 5--AK Questionable Site/age Tree Flag

Record the appropriate code to identify whether the current site/age tree meets (or does not meet) the selection criteria as outlined above. Remeasurement Note: If AK site/age tree status = “O” (old) then any site/age trees that also have a downloaded “AK questionable site/age tree flag” of S, A, or B will need to be replaced with a new site/age that meets the selection criteria outlined above. If a site/age tree that better represents the condition is measured and entered as a replacement, then the old “O” site/age tree should then be changed to “I” (invalid old site/age tree). When collected: All site/age trees Field width: 1 Tolerance: No errors MQO: At least 70% of the time Values:

Code Description C selection criteria met S Site tree does not meet selection criteria A Age tree does not meet selection criteria B Both site & age trees do not meet selection criteria

Item 6--CONDITION CLASS LIST (C)

List all CONDITION CLASSES that the site index data from this tree represent. List all CONDITION CLASSES associated with this tree record, regardless of type (i.e. whether it is site, age, or both) and regardless of whether it is a new “N” or old “O” tree record. Remeasurement Note: On a remeasurement plot, if there is a change in condition assignment from previous visit due to a crew error or change in procedure (ex. last visit a condition (polygon) was assigned as 1 and this visit the condition was changed or corrected to 2); then crews should re-assign all “Old” site trees that are still valid, to the proper condition as assigned during the current visit. When Collected: All site/age trees Field width: 5 digits Tolerance: No errors

Page 134: FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF …€¦ · 07/11/2011  · FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF COASTAL ALASKA 2009 Forest Inventory and Analysis Program

Annual Inventory 2009 IX. SITE TREE INFORMATION

126

MQO: At least 99% of the time Values: 1 to 56789

Item 7--AK Tally Tree Number (Trn)

This number is usually automatically recorded when the site/age tree is copied from a tally tree record or it is a downloaded “old” site/age tally tree (from the previous visit). However, “000” should be entered on all “new” site/age trees that are not tallied in the tree data screen (i.e. non tally site/age trees). When collected: downloaded site/age tally trees, trees copied from the tree data screen, and “000” for all non-tally site/age trees. Field width: 3 Tolerance: No errors MQO: At least 99% of the time Values: 000-999

Item 8--AZIMUTH (Azm)

Record the AZIMUTH from the subplot center; sight the center of the base of each tree with a compass. Record AZIMUTH to the nearest degree. Use 360 for north. Record an azimuth for new site/age trees. Record the azimuth even if the site/age tree is not within 24.0 feet of a subplot center. When Collected: All site/age trees Field width: 3 digits Tolerance: +/- 10 degrees MQO: At least 90% of the time Values: 001 to 360

Item 9--HORIZONTAL DISTANCE (Hdst)

Record the measured HORIZONTAL DISTANCE, to the nearest 0.1 ft, from the subplot center to the pith of the tree at the base. When Collected: All site/age trees Field width: 4 digits (xxx.y) Tolerance: +/- 5 ft MQO: At least 90% of the time Values: 000.1 to 200.0

Item 10--SPECIES (Spc)

Species is downloaded for site/age trees previously collected. Record for new site/age trees.

When Collected: All site/age trees Values:

CODE SPECIES CODE SPECIES 011 Pacific silver fir 242 western redcedar 019 subalpine fir 263 western hemlock 042 Alaska yellow-cedar 264 mountain hemlock 094 white spruce 351 red alder

Page 135: FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF …€¦ · 07/11/2011  · FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF COASTAL ALASKA 2009 Forest Inventory and Analysis Program

Annual Inventory 2009 IX. SITE TREE INFORMATION

127

095 black spruce 375 paper birch 098 sitka spruce 746 quaking aspen 108 lodgepole pine 747 black cottonwood

Item 11--DIAMETER (Dbh)

Use the same procedures and tolerances described on page 107.

Diameter is downloaded for site/age trees previously collected. Record for new site/age trees.

When Collected: All site/age trees

Item 12--SITE TREE LENGTH (Ht)

With a clinometer or other approved instrument, measure the total length of the site tree from the ground to the top of the tree. Record to the nearest 1.0 foot. SITE TREE LENGTH must be measured; no estimates are permitted on site trees. Downloaded for site/age trees previously collected. However, if the downloaded site/age tree is missing the SITE TREE LENGTH then the crew should make an attempt to obtain new height. When Collected: All site trees and new age trees Field width: 3 digits Tolerance: +/- 10% of true length MQO: At least 90% of the time Values: 005 to 999

Item 13--TREE AGE AT DIAMETER (Age)

Record the tree age as determined by an increment sample. Bore the tree just below the point of diameter measurement (d.b.h.) with an increment borer. Count the rings between the outside edge of the core and the pith. Do not add years to get total age. Downloaded for site/age trees previously collected. When Collected: All site/age trees Field width: 3 digits Tolerance: +/- 5 years MQO: At least 95% of the time Values: 001 to 999 Determining breast-height age of large trees: To determine the age of a tree whose radius is greater than the length of the increment borer, use the following procedure. To access the extrapolated age utility on the field data recorder: push Ctrl + Z while the Age field is highlighted; enter in all the data required (see steps below and use F1 help screens as needed). When finished, the extrapolated age should be entered into the Age field. Make sure that AK age determination method (next variable) gets a code of 2, showing age is extrapolated.

Page 136: FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF …€¦ · 07/11/2011  · FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF COASTAL ALASKA 2009 Forest Inventory and Analysis Program

Annual Inventory 2009 IX. SITE TREE INFORMATION

128

1. Bore into the tree as far as possible, extract the core, and count the rings. 2. Count the number of rings in the inner 2 inches of the core. 3. Measure the total length of the extracted core to the nearest 0.1 inch. (include the entire

thickness of bark, even though some of it may not be in the core because it crumbled or the tree was cored in a bark furrow)

4. Divide the tree's diameter by 2. 5. Subtract (3) from (4). This gives you the distance by which you are short of reaching tree

center. 6. Divide this number (5) by 2. This tells you how many 2-inch lengths you were short by. 7. Multiply this number (6) by the number of rings in inner 2 inches (2). 8. Add this number (7) to the total number of rings in the extracted core (1). This is the

tree's estimated breast-high age. 9. Make sure that AK age determination method (next variable) gets a code of 2, showing

age is extrapolated. Example: Determine the age of a 59.6-inch Douglas-fir. The core has 110 rings, and has 10 rings in the inner 2 inches. 0.8 in. of the 16.4-inch-long increment borer did not penetrate the tree. Each number below is associated with its corresponding step above:

Step 1: 110 rings counted Step 2: 10 rings in the inner 2 in. of the core Step 3: 14.6 in. of core was extracted + 1 in of bark that was not in the core = 15.6 Step 4: 59.6 in. is the tree’s diameter and you then divide by 2 = 29.8 in. to center of

tree (pith) Step 5: 29.8 in. (true center) – 15.6 in. (measured core) = 14.2 in. short of reaching

the pith Step 6: 14.2 in./ 2 = 7.1 (2 in.) lengths short Step 7: 7.1 (from step6) x 10 (from step 2) = 71 rings not counted Step 8: 110 rings counted (step 1) + 71 rings not counted (step 7) = 181 years old at

BH Step 9: for Item 14 use code 2 (bored and extrapolated age)

After boring a tree for age, leave the extracted increment core at the base of the tree (for the convenience of QA inspection).

Item 14--AK Age Determination Method Record the code that best describes how the age was determined in the field. When collected: All site/age trees Field width: 1 Tolerance: No errors MQO: 99% of the time Values:

Code Description 1 Bored age 2 Bored and extrapolated (core bit cannot reach the center of the tree)

Page 137: FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF …€¦ · 07/11/2011  · FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF COASTAL ALASKA 2009 Forest Inventory and Analysis Program

Annual Inventory 2009 IX. SITE TREE INFORMATION

129

Item 15--SITE TREE NOTES Record notes pertaining to an individual site tree. Record notes to clarify or describe a situation in the individual site tree record (line) by pushing the F4 key.

When collected: All site trees as necessary Field width: 40 Tolerance: N/A MQO: N/A Values: Single words and abbreviated sentences

Page 138: FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF …€¦ · 07/11/2011  · FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF COASTAL ALASKA 2009 Forest Inventory and Analysis Program

Annual Inventory 2009 X. COORDINATES (GPS)

130

X. COORDINATES (GPS) A. OVERVIEW An objective of the inventory is to obtain accurate GPS coordinates for each field grid location. Coordinates are used to correlate plot information with remotely sensed imagery and data and in relocating the plot at future inventories. For the collection of GPS coordinates Alaska PNW-FIA uses Garmin GPSmap 76Cx GPS receivers. B. WHEN AND WHERE TO COLLECT READINGS For each plot visited, collect a GPS reading that has averaged for at least 180 readings with an EPE (estimated position error) of 70 feet or less. Try to collect an adequate set of readings as soon as the center of subplot 1 is located. If unsuccessful, try again shortly before going to the next subplot. Success is GPS-generated coordinates based on a reading that has averaged for at least 180 readings with < 70 feet EPE. If there is no success at the plot center location, try to obtain coordinates in an opening or nearby area that gets better satellite coverage. If you can now successfully meet minimum requirements to collect, then be sure to enter the distance and azimuth to plot center in the appropriate fields (see GPS Info in the Plot Level Data chapter). If you are still unsuccessful at getting good coordinates near the plot center, then collect them at one of the other three subplot centers and note accordingly. NOTE: Allow at least 45 min to an hour between readings to allow for different or new satellites to come into clear view of the receiver. If more than one coordinate is collected, record the coordinate that is closest to subplot 1 center and has averaged for at least 180 readings. Write any other collected GPS coordinates or any notes regarding GPS use on the front of the location record. Record the azimuth and distance from the GPS reading location to the center of subplot 1. C. RECORDING GPS INFORMATION GPS information is recorded in the field data recorder (See GPS INFO in the PLOT LEVEL DATA section of manual). The following info is entered in the data recorder:

GPS LOCATION TYPE (Code = #) GPS TYPE (Unit = 2) GPS SERIAL NUMBER (######, located above GPS screen) COODINATE SYSTEM (Sys = 1) LATITUDE DEGREES- (##) LATITUDE MINUTES- (#####) LONGITUDE DEGREES- (###) LONGITUDE MINUTES- (#####) NUMBER OF READINGS (Read = ###) GPS ERROR (Error = ###) rounded up to next whole number (ex. 20.3’ would be 21’) GPS ELEVATION (Elev. = #####) AZIMUTH TO PLOT CENTER (Azm = ###) if coordinates collected at PC enter 000. DISTANCE TO PLOT CENTER (Dist = ###) if coordinates collected at PC enter 000

** Important Note** the data recorder requires that the number of averaged readings be entered. The Garmin unit utilizes a number of readings counter and this number should be entered into the data recorder.

Page 139: FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF …€¦ · 07/11/2011  · FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF COASTAL ALASKA 2009 Forest Inventory and Analysis Program

Annual Inventory 2009 X. COORDINATES (GPS)

131

D. GPS KEYPAD LAYOUT AND COMMANDS

PWR: (red circle) key, hold down to turn the unit on and off. Press to adjust screen backlighting.

ENTER: (mark) press and release to enter highlighted option. Press and hold from any main menu/navigation screen to mark a waypoint.

MENU: press and release to view the Options Menu for a page. Press twice to view main menu.

QUIT: cancels the operation of the last button pressed and/or moves to previous screen

FIND: (MOB) Press to go to the find menu. Highlight waypoints and a list of saved waypoints will appear.

PAGE: press to move forward through main menu pages

IN: zooms in the display of the map screen

OUT: zooms out the display of the map screen

LEFT/RIGHT (Rocker Key) move the cursor left or right while entering data or selecting menu options

UP/DOWN (Rocker Key) move the cursor up and down while entering data or selecting menu options.

Initiate screen backlight: quickly press the PWR key.

Note: Adjust screen backlight: after turning the screen backlight on, press the power key again to brighten, press again to turn off.

Page 140: FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF …€¦ · 07/11/2011  · FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF COASTAL ALASKA 2009 Forest Inventory and Analysis Program

Annual Inventory 2009 X. COORDINATES (GPS)

132

E. GPS SETUP OPTIONS Listed below are the parameters to be set up before collecting satellite readings. Once these parameters are set up for the first time they will not need to be reset. Periodically (at least weekly) the unit should be checked to see that the settings have not been inadvertently changed. GPS UNIT SETUP The Garmin has several MAIN MENU screens that can be displayed or turned off. Some screens must be displayed in order to get coordinate information. Several screens display similar or the same information and it is recommended that these screens not be displayed. When the unit is powered on, the “Main” Main Menu screen appears. Scroll to the right and highlight Setup and press ENTER key. Select the following fields one at a time and check that the correct information is set to display in each. To open each, scroll to it’s icon and press Enter. Press DOWN key to select setup option, then press the ENTER key to change units. Scroll through drop down list and press enter to update/change field. When done, Press Quit to exit and choose new field from the Setup menu.

System: set “GPS” to battery saver, set “WAAS/EGNOS” to enabled, set “battery type” to alkaline (if using this type).

Time: set “Time Zone” to US Alaska and turn on daylight savings.

After system and time are set, scroll to the Units icon and press Enter.

Units: To scroll through the following pages use the up/down arrows. Position Format: Lat/Lon = DEG/MIN.MMM MAP DATUM: NAD83 Distance/Speed: Statute Elevation: Feet (ft/min)

Heading: “Display” set to Degrees and “North Reference” to Magnetic IMPORTANT: Make sure that the MAP DATUM being used is the correct DATUM specified for your area. This is set on the UNITS page. Using a different datum will alter the coordinates significantly. MAIN MENU PAGES The Garmin has 6 main menu screens. These can be scrolled through by pressing “Page” to scroll forward or “Quit” to scroll back through them. The menu screens are: Main Menu, Find, Satellite, Trip Computer, Compass, and Map.

*Battery status and signal strength can be checked in the status bar at the top of all Main Menu/Navigation screens.

Page 141: FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF …€¦ · 07/11/2011  · FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF COASTAL ALASKA 2009 Forest Inventory and Analysis Program

Annual Inventory 2009 X. COORDINATES (GPS)

133

CUSTOMIZING NAVIGATION SCREENS It is important that navigation screens are setup consistently among all units. Office defaults will be set for each unit. While most screens can be customized, it is recommended that the office defaults remain consistent. For most screens, small numbers will be selected to show more data fields. While on a NAV screen, press MENU to open the options menu, to change data fields highlight “change data fields” and press ENTER. Now scroll to each individual field and press ENTER to open the drop down menu. Scroll through to highlight desired field and press ENTER to set. When all fields are changed, press QUIT to save all changes. Satellite Page: This page shows how many satellites are being received by the unit and which ones are coming into view. Trip Computer: It is recommended that the office defaults be left for this screen. At minimum Accuracy, Time, Bearing, Heading, Elevation, and Dist. To Destination should be kept on all units. Compass: It is recommended this screen be left as set, Accuracy, Dist to Destination, Bearing, and Heading are most useful. Map: The map screen will be set to show map only. F. OPERATING THE GPS ON PLOT Carry extra batteries at all times. The two AA-alkaline batteries begin to lose power after approximately eight hours of use. See Section K. Batteries, for more details. 1. Turn on the GPS unit 2. Check to see if the unit is receiving satellite readings by pressing the PAGE key until the satellite status screen is visible. The satellite status screen shows 2 circles in the middle of the screen, and the satellite signal strength chart at the bottom. When the unit begins receiving satellites, the Acquiring Satellites message at the top will be replaced by the EPE and current Lat/Long. 3. All recorded coordinates (lat/long), elevation, number of readings, etc are entered under Plot Level Data (GPS Info) in the data recorder. If the coordinates are recorded at plot center, then azimuth and distance to plot center will be recorded as zero. See section H (Waypoints) below for a discussion of marking and averaging your location (LZ, RP, PC). G. COLLECTING COORDINATES AWAY FROM PLOT CENTER If you can not get an adequate set of readings at plot center, you may take readings at another location, and then record the azimuth and distance to plot center so that someone in the office can calculate the coordinates at plot center. Take the GPS unit to a location where you will be able to collect 180 averaged readings at < 70ft accuracy, and where you will be able to accurately measure the horizontal distance, azimuth and slope to plot center.

Page 142: FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF …€¦ · 07/11/2011  · FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF COASTAL ALASKA 2009 Forest Inventory and Analysis Program

Annual Inventory 2009 X. COORDINATES (GPS)

134

Record the coordinates, elevation, number of readings, azimuth, and distance to plot center under Plot Data in the data recorder. H. WAYPOINTS CREATING A WAYPOINT (when coordinates are given) A waypoint is a fairly precise location that a GPS user may assign a number and/or label to identify. For Alaska PNW-FIA the location format is Latitude/Longitude. This format requires this information: Lat degrees- a 2 digit number and Lat minutes – a 5-digit number. Long degrees– a 3 digit number and Long minutes – a 5-digit number. To create a new waypoint with given coordinates from existing plot data, turn on the GPS and then hold down the ENTER/MARK button. This will bring up the MARK screen with OK highlighted. Scroll up until the waypoint number field is highlighted. Press ENTER to rename the waypoint [(ex. “12345NAV”) see below]. In naming the waypoint, add the letters NAV when using given coordinates from the folder data to distinguish from real-on-the- ground collected GPS points. Hit OK on the keypad screen when done. Highlight Location and press ENTER. Edit both lines of the location field by using the pop up keypad to edit the LAT/LONG field. When the coordinates are displayed correctly, highlight OK and press ENTER. Edit the Elevation field in the same manner. If you need to edit the icon, or note for a waypoint, use the UP/DOWN arrows to highlight the field you wish to change and press ENTER. Edit in same manner as just described. When you have entered all the necessary data, highlight the OK button (bottom right of screen), and press ENTER. (To navigate to a newly created waypoint, see section I below.) MARKING/AVERAGING YOUR CURRENT LOCATION Storing the location of a vehicle, LZ or RP, or starting point is a good example on how you can use this feature in the field. Stored waypoints can be useful in approaching locations in a different way, taking a different route back to the LZ, or if you should get lost (see navigating to a waypoint). To start, make sure the unit is on and you are receiving good signals. Check the Satellite screen (see Section F. Operating the GPS) and be sure that you are getting strong signals. Wait until the EPE (estimated position error) is 70 feet or less. Hold down the ENTER/MARK button until the MARK screen appears. Before you move the GPS, you need to average the point’s location. Scroll to the left and highlight AVG. Push ENTER to begin averaging. Watch the EPE and wait until the Measurement Count reaches 180. At this point, push and hold ENTER to save. Be sure to note the EPE before you save! The coordinates are now “locked in” and you can move the GPS without fear of changing the coordinates. Next, edit the waypoint name (see below). Finally, scroll to the bottom of the screen and choose OK to save the new waypoint. NOTE: when entering coordinates into the PDR for the PC, RP, LZ, etc., wait until after you have “averaged” the waypoint (don’t read off and enter the coordinates prior to averaging).

Page 143: FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF …€¦ · 07/11/2011  · FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF COASTAL ALASKA 2009 Forest Inventory and Analysis Program

Annual Inventory 2009 X. COORDINATES (GPS)

135

The GPS’s current location (under the assigned name), is now stored in its memory and can be used to navigate with. NAMING COLLECTED/AVERAGED WAYPOINTS The Garmin waypoint name allows us up to 14 numbers/letters. The first five digits of the name should be the plot number (on the folder). (ex. if the plot number is 30 then plot number is 00030). The next 2-3 digits would be LZ, TR, RP, PC, SP2, SP3, SP4, or OTH. LZ/TR = landing zone, or truck parking spot RP = Reference Point PC = Plot Center SP2 = Subplot 2 SP3 = Subplot 3 SP4 = Subplot 4 OTH = Other, describe in GPS notes/location record

I. NAVIGATING WITH THE GPS To begin navigation, you must first have a waypoint stored in the GPS unit (see Section H. Waypoints). A compass will be needed. (NOTE: keep the compass away from the body of the GPS to keep it from affecting the magnetic accuracy). Once you know which waypoint number you are going to travel towards, turn the GPS on and then, after the unit has locked onto satellites, push the FIND button. Highlight “Waypoints” in the menu, and press ENTER. A list of user-stored waypoints appears. Scroll down through the list until you find the name or number of the desired waypoint. (For example: a NAV waypoint as created in Section H) Highlight the desired waypoint and press ENTER. If you are not getting satellite signals then you will get the bearing and distance to the waypoint you selected from the last position the GPS unit obtained satellite signals. You may want to move in the general direction of the waypoint and hope that satellites will come into better view, or you may want to let the GPS sit for a few minutes to lock onto a signal. Once you are sure you are receiving satellites you can highlight the GO TO tab on the bottom right of the screen to begin navigation. The map screen should appear and you can select which of the several navigation screens you wish to use by scrolling with the Page or Quit buttons. Follow the bearing using a compass, as you walk towards the waypoint the distance should steadily decrease. Eventually, as you get closer to the waypoint, the distance will get very small (about 10-30ft), and the bearing will begin to jump around dramatically. This means that you are very close to your destination (so look for the stake and witness trees if the waypoint is subplot 1). Other data you might see on the navigation screens:

Bearing This is the direction to your destination from your present position, in degrees, from North.

Distance This is distance (measured in the Nav Units selected in Setup) to your destination.

Heading This is the direction you are moving (measured in degrees). When the heading and bearing are the same, you are traveling in a direct line to your destination.

Page 144: FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF …€¦ · 07/11/2011  · FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF COASTAL ALASKA 2009 Forest Inventory and Analysis Program

Annual Inventory 2009 X. COORDINATES (GPS)

136

Speed This is the rate that you are traveling. The unit of measure is selected in Setup - Nav Units. J. BATTERIES Garmin GPSmap76Cx units use two AA alkaline, NiMH, or lithium batteries; alkaline usually last for eight hours of use. Replace the batteries when the Power Indicator (found on the top of the navigation screens) is low. The GPS may have trouble locating satellites if the battery is low.

GPS Notes:

Page 145: FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF …€¦ · 07/11/2011  · FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF COASTAL ALASKA 2009 Forest Inventory and Analysis Program

Annual Inventory 2009 XI. LASER 200 INSTRUCTIONS

137

XI. LASER 200 INSTRUCTIONS A. OVERVIEW Accurate heights are necessary in our inventory in order to determine volume and for other uses. The Laser can be used to get fast and accurate tree heights. It can also be used to measure distances and % slope. This instrument is more fragile than the GPS units. Some precautions must be taken with the Lasers to keep them working properly. These are:

1. Never look at the sun through the scope. Looking directly at the sun can permanently damage your eyes.

2. Never point the Laser directly at the sun. Exposing the lens system to direct sunlight, even for a brief period, may permanently damage the laser transmitter.

3. Do not expose the Laser to extreme temperatures. It is rated for a temperature range of -22 to +140 deg. F. Don’t leave the instrument in the vehicle during the heat of the day.

4. Do not use batteries with “voltage check” features built on the batteries. The battery case of the Laser is too narrow for these batteries, and they could get stuck in the instrument.

5. Do not drop the Laser. Immediately return it to its case when you are finished using it. B. BASIC OPERATION All directions for using the Laser buttons are given assuming you are holding the instrument with the LCD display screen facing you and the 2 round lenses are facing the object you want to measure. The buttons will be referred to as: L1 the left button closest to you L2 the left button in the middle L3 the left button furthest away from you R1 the right button closest to you R2 the right button in the middle R3 the right button furthest away from you Turn the Laser on by pushing L1 or R1 Turn it off by pushing L2 and L3 at the same time. The Laser may turn itself off after a period of inactivity. Once the instrument is on, push the R1 button to make the red dot appear in the sighting scope. If there is no red sighting dot, repeatedly push the L2 button until the red dot appears and is the correct brightness. To light up the display screen, press L3. Press L3 again to turn off the light. C. SETTINGS Make sure the settings are correct before using the Laser. To set the correct measurement units, go into the main menu and:

1. Press R2 or R3 to scroll through the menu until SYS is displayed in the upper right hand corner of the screen.

2. Press R1. ON or OFF will show in the center of the screen. FILTER will flash at the bottom.

3. Press R2 until OFFSET is flashing. The number displayed should be 0000.00. 4. Press R2 until PIVOT is flashing. The number displayed should be 0000.59. When this

number is set at 0.00, the Laser is set to calculate heights using a tripod attached to the center of the instrument. The pivot point is the center of the Laser. We use the pivot value at 0.59 because this sets the pivot point at the rear of the instrument, and this allows you to shoot a height while using your head as the pivot point. To change this

Page 146: FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF …€¦ · 07/11/2011  · FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF COASTAL ALASKA 2009 Forest Inventory and Analysis Program

Annual Inventory 2009 XI. LASER 200 INSTRUCTIONS

138

number, press L1 until the number you want to change is flashing. Press L2 or L3 until the correct number is showing. When the number is set at 0000.59, press R1.

5. Press R2 until UNITS is flashing. Select F (feet) using the R1 button. 6. Press R2 again and D (degrees) should be flashing. If not, press R1 to toggle on D. 7. Press R2 again and % should be flashing. It should say ON. If not, press R1. 8. Press R3 twice to accept the new settings and back out to the main display.

D. FILTER AND REFLECTORS When you are working in areas of dense brush, you need to make sure the Laser is giving you the distance to the correct target. The best way to do this is to use a reflector as a target and use the filter option on the Laser. The Laser will only lock onto the highly reflective targets and ignore the less reflective brush. To use the filter option:

1. Place a reflector (or have someone hold it) on the tree where it can be seen from the required distance. The Laser will not work in the filter mode without a reflector as a target.

2. Go to the main menu on the Laser and push R2 or R3 until SYS is displayed on the screen.

3. Press R1 to select the SYS option. The FILTER option will blink, and it will say the FILTER is OFF or ON.

4. Push R1 to toggle FILTER between ON and OFF. 5. Press R3 to save the desired setting and to back out into the main display. When the

FILTER is on, FILTER will appear at the bottom of the screen when the Laser is measuring distances.

E. DISTANCES AND % SLOPE Horizontal distance (HD): Turn the Laser on. The top-middle of the LCD screen will say HD. Point the red sighting dot at the target. Press R1 and hold it down until the Laser locks on the target, then release. You can tell when the instrument locks onto its target by sound. It buzzes while it is searching for the target, then beeps when it locks on to a target or there is an error. If you get an error message, simply aim again and press R1. Slope distance (SD) and Vertical distance (VD): Push R2 or R3 until the correct display is shown. Then aim and press R1 until the Laser locks on target. Or, measure a horizontal distance, then push R2 until the correct display is shown. % slope: Press R2 or R3 until INC is displayed. Then aim and press R1. F. TREE HEIGHTS The best way to measure a tree height is to make sure you have a clear shot at the leader or a clear shot of the tree trunk. Make sure you are getting a distance to the tree trunk, and not some branches in front of it. If you can’t get a clear shot at the leader or the tree trunk, use a reflector (see section D). Once you are in position with your target in sight, go to the main menu: 1. Push R2 or R3 until HT is displayed in the upper left of the screen. 2. Push R1 once; aim at the target, then push R1 until the Laser locks on target. This will

measure the horizontal distance. 3. The down arrow will flash. Aim at the base of the tree and push R1 to get the % slope. 4. The up arrow will flash. Aim at the top of the tree and push R1 again to get another % slope. 5. Press R1 once more and the Laser will display the height. Make sure this height is

reasonable before recording it in the data recorder.

Page 147: FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF …€¦ · 07/11/2011  · FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF COASTAL ALASKA 2009 Forest Inventory and Analysis Program

Annual Inventory 2009 TABLE OF CONTENTS - APPENDICES

139

TABLE OF CONTENTS

APPENDICES

APPENDIX 1 -- RADIO INFORMATION ..................................................................................140

APPENDIX 2 -- METRIC EQUIVALENTS................................................................................147

APPENDIX 3 -- SLOPE CORRECTION TABLE......................................................................149

APPENDIX 4 -- DETERMINATION OF STOCKING VALUES FOR LAND USE CLASSIFICATION....................................................................................................................150

APPENDIX 5 -- GLOSSARY....................................................................................................154

APPENDIX 6 -- CUBIC FOOT VOLUME TABLE.....................................................................159

APPENDIX 7 -- FORMS ...........................................................................................................160

APPENDIX 8 -- EQUIPMENT CHECKLIST .............................................................................166

Page 148: FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF …€¦ · 07/11/2011  · FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF COASTAL ALASKA 2009 Forest Inventory and Analysis Program

Annual Inventory 2009 APPENDIX 1 – RADIO INFORMATION

140

Appendix 1 -- Radio Information Radio communications for the 2009 season includes repeaters that extend from Ketchikan to the Kenai Peninsula, it is very important that crew leaders keep up to date with the frequencies (by group) that are available in the immediate vicinity of the boat. There will be daily briefings discussing radio (repeater) coverage information, it is important that all personnel be trained in radio usage and that everyone keep track of current radio (repeater) coverage. REMEMBER: if radio communication is not possible, a cell phone or satellite phone is a good alternative. To change groups in the radio do the following: press #, then 01 (for group 01, insert group number that is to become active, 02, 03, 04…etc), then ENT. Verify that you are in the right group by looking at the LCD screen (under the plastic cover) Use the blank tables below for any special frequencies or any other specific user information that you want to track Radio Information Channel RX Freq TX Freq TX CG Repeater 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 Phone Number Information Phone Type Phone Number Person The next pages include repeater location maps and frequency lists for all the channel groups that will be pre-installed on the field going radios.

Page 149: FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF …€¦ · 07/11/2011  · FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF COASTAL ALASKA 2009 Forest Inventory and Analysis Program

Annual Inventory 2009 APPENDIX 1 - RADIO INFORMATION

141

Page 150: FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF …€¦ · 07/11/2011  · FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF COASTAL ALASKA 2009 Forest Inventory and Analysis Program

Annual Inventory 2009 APPENDIX 1 – RADIO INFORMATION

142

CHANNEL GROUP 1 SITKA/HOONAH AREA GROUP DISPLAY NAME SIT/HNH Channel Receive RXCG Transmit TXCG NAME NB/WBCH1 156.800 0.0 156.800 0.0 MARINE16 WB CH2 168.675 0.0 171.475 100.0 PORT RPT NB CH3 168.725 0.0 168.725 141.3 N KRUZOF NB CH4 168.675 0.0 168.675 141.3 MUD BAY NB CH5 168.725 0.0 171.575 123.0 NEKA NB CH6 168.725 0.0 171.575 114.8 SEAL NB CH7 168.725 0.0 171.575 136.5 STEELHD NB CH8 168.675 0.0 171.475 136.5 BIORKA NB CH9 168.675 0.0 171.475 123.0 MOORE MT NB CH10 168.675 0.0 171.475 114.8 FURUHELM NB CH11 170.125 0.0 170.125 123.0 CREWNET NB CH12 168.725 0.0 171.575 100.0 ROBERT B NB CH13 162.550 0.0 0.000 0.0 WEATHER WB CH14 163.100 0.0 163.100 0.0 CREWNET NB Narrow Band (NB) = 12.5 Khz analog channel Wide Band (WB) = 25 Khz analog channel CHANNEL GROUP 2 JUNEAU AREA GROUP DISPLAY NAME JUNEAU Channel Receive RXCG Transmit TXCG NAME NB/WBCH1 162.550 0.0 0.000 0.0 WEATHER WB CH2 169.100 0.0 170.150 114.8 WINDFALL NB CH3*** 170.150 0.0 169.100 88.5 AUKE MT NB*** CH4 169.100 0.0 170.150 100.0 PORT RPT NB CH5 169.100 0.0 170.150 123.0 WILHENRY NB CH6 168.725 0.0 171.575 114.8 SEAL NB CH7 169.100 0.0 170.150 77.0 TAKU NB CH8 169.100 0.0 170.150 71.9 BEEZER NB CH9 168.675 0.0 171.475 123.0 MOORE MT NB CH10 168.675 0.0 171.475 114.8 FURUHELM NB CH11 170.125 0.0 170.125 123.0 CREWNET NB CH12 168.725 0.0 171.575 100.0 ROBERT B NB CH13 156.800 0.0 156.800 0.0 MARINE16 WB CH14 163.100 0.0 163.100 0.0 CREWNET NB

Page 151: FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF …€¦ · 07/11/2011  · FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF COASTAL ALASKA 2009 Forest Inventory and Analysis Program

Annual Inventory 2009 APPENDIX 1 - RADIO INFORMATION

143

CHANNEL GROUP 3 YAKUTAT AREA GROUP DISPLAY NAME YAKUTAT Channel Receive RXCG Transmit TXCG NAME NB/WBCH1 163.100 0.0 163.100 123.0 GND AIR NB CH2 169.100 0.0 169.100 123.0 YRD LCL NB CH3 169.100 0.0 170.150 103.5 AKWE NB CH4 169.100 0.0 170.150 82.5 MT LAKE NB CH5 166.750 0.0 168.575 100.0 DRY BAY NB CH6 166.300 0.0 168.225 100.0 TERRACE NB CH7 166.900 0.0 164.750 100.0 ICY BAY NB CH8 155.160 0.0 155.160 0.0 YAK EMS WB CH9 156.800 0.0 156.800 0.0 MARINE16 WB CH10 155.400 0.0 150.775 100.0 YAK 911 WB CH11 170.125 0.0 170.125 123.0 CREWNET NB CH12 169.100 0.0 170.150 136.5 PORT RPT NB CH13 162.400 0.0 0.000 0.0 WEATHER WB CH14 163.100 0.0 163.100 0.0 CREWNET NB NOTE: Occasionally there will be more than one CREWNET listed in any given channel group, This is to keep channel assignments consistent with what the local FS user radios will have in their program (in cases of joint emergency cooperation). For FIA uses, the CREWNET located in the channel 14 slot will be used for helicopter operations (line of sight) and as conditions permit calls to the boat. CHANNEL GROUP 4 STIKINE AREA PETERSBURG GROUP DISPLAY NAME STIKINE PETERSB Channel Receive RXCG Transmit TXCG NAME NB/WBCH1 169.175 0.0 169.175 123.0 LNDNBRG NB CH2 169.875 0.0 169.875 0.0 CREWNET NB CH3 169.175 0.0 169.900 103.5 ETOLIN NB CH4 169.175 0.0 169.900 110.9 KUIU NB CH5 169.175 0.0 169.900 131.8 FOOLS NB CH6 169.175 0.0 169.900 136.5 FARRAGUT NB CH7 169.175 0.0 169.900 146.2 ELBOW NB CH8 169.175 0.0 169.900 156.7 TYEE NB CH9 169.125 0.0 168.175 136.5 RED BAY NB CH10 169.150 0.0 168.150 114.8 BURNETT NB CH11 168.675 0.0 171.475 114.8 FURUHELM NB CH12 162.400 0.0 0.000 0.0 WEATHER WB CH13 156.800 0.0 156.800 0.0 MARINE16 WB CH14 163.100 0.0 163.100 0.0 CREWNET NB

Page 152: FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF …€¦ · 07/11/2011  · FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF COASTAL ALASKA 2009 Forest Inventory and Analysis Program

Annual Inventory 2009 APPENDIX 1 – RADIO INFORMATION

144

CHANNEL GROUP 5 KETCHIKAN POW AREA GROUP DISPLAY NAME KET POW Channel Receive RXCG Transmit TXCG NAME NB/WBCH1 169.125 0.0 169.125 100.0 POW LCL NB CH2 169.125 0.0 168.175 114.8 12 MILE NB CH3 169.125 0.0 168.175 123.0 TWIN PKS NB CH4 169.125 0.0 168.175 136.5 RED BAY NB CH5 169.125 0.0 168.175 151.4 POLK NB CH6 169.125 0.0 168.175 167.9 BOKAN NB CH7 169.125 0.0 168.175 186.2 PORT-1 NB CH8 169.125 0.0 168.175 203.5 PORT-2 NB CH9 169.150 0.0 169.150 100.0 REV LCL NB CH10 169.150 0.0 168.150 114.8 BURNETT NB CH11 162.550 0.0 0.000 0.0 WX-1 WB CH12 156.800 0.0 156.800 0.0 MARINE16 WB CH13 157.100 0.0 157.100 0.0 MARINE22 WB CH14 163.100 0.0 163.100 0.0 CREWNET NB CHANNEL GROUP 6 KETCHIKAN REVILLA AREA GROUP NAME KET/REV Channel Receive RXCG Transmit TXCG NAME NB/WBCH1 169.150 0.0 169.150 100.0 REV LCL NB CH2 169.150 0.0 168.150 114.8 BURNETT NB CH3 169.150 0.0 168.150 123.0 ORCHARD NB CH4 169.150 0.0 168.150 136.5 BOCA NB CH5 169.150 0.0 168.150 151.4 PUNCHBWL NB CH6 169.150 0.0 168.150 167.9 HIGH MTN NB CH7 169.150 0.0 168.150 186.2 BLACK MTN NB CH8 169.150 0.0 168.150 203.5 PORT NB CH9 169.125 0.0 169.125 100.0 POW LCL NB CH10 169.125 0.0 168.175 123.0 TWIN PKS NB CH11 162.550 0.0 0.000 0.0 WX-1 WB CH12 156.800 0.0 156.800 0.0 MARINE16 WB CH13 157.100 0.0 157.100 0.0 MARINE22 WB CH14 163.100 0.0 163.100 0.0 CREWNET NB

Page 153: FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF …€¦ · 07/11/2011  · FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF COASTAL ALASKA 2009 Forest Inventory and Analysis Program

Annual Inventory 2009 APPENDIX 1 - RADIO INFORMATION

145

CHANNEL GROUP 7 CHUGACH AREA GROUP NAME CHUGACH Channel Receive RXCG Transmit TXCG NAME NB/WBCH1 169.175 0.0 169.175 0.0 CH 1 NB CH2 169.175 0.0 169.975 110.9 CH 2 NB CH3 169.175 0.0 169.975 123.0 CH 3 NB CH4 169.175 0.0 169.975 131.8 CH 4 NB CH5 169.175 0.0 169.975 136.5 CH 5 NB CH6 169.175 0.0 169.975 146.2 CH 6 NB CH7 169.175 0.0 169.975 156.7 CH 7 NB CH8 169.175 0.0 169.975 167.9 CH 8 NB CH9 169.125 0.0 169.125 0.0 CREW NET NB CH10 162.550 0.0 0.000 0.0 WEATHER WB CH11 156.800 0.0 156.800 0.0 MARINE16 WB CH12 157.100 0.0 157.100 0.0 MARINE22 WB CH13 EMPTY CH14 163.100 0.0 163.100 0.0 CREWNET NB NOTE: Chugach dispatch uses channel number (as opposed to using repeater locations [Tongass]) when identifying which repeater is being used. Use the Chugach repeater map as a guide for which repeater(s) are best to use for your location. CHANNEL GROUP 8 MARINE CHANNELS GROUP DISPLAY NAME MARINE Channel Receive RXCG Transmit TXCG NAME NB/WBCH 1 156.800 0.0 156.800 0.0 MARINE16 WB CH 2 157.100 0.0 157.100 0.0 MARINE22 WB CH 3 156.050 0.0 156.050 0.0 MARINE01 WB CH 4 156.300 0.0 156.300 0.0 MARINE06 WB CH 5 156.350 0.0 156.350 0.0 MARINE07 WB CH 6 156.450 0.0 156.450 0.0 MARINE09 WB CH 7 156.500 0.0 156.500 0.0 MARINE10 WB CH 8 156.600 0.0 156.600 0.0 MARINE12 WB CH 9 156.650 0.0 156.650 0.0 MARINE13 WB CH10 156.375 0.0 156.375 0.0 MARINE67 WB CH11 156.425 0.0 156.425 0.0 MARINE68 WB CH12 156.475 0.0 156.475 0.0 MARINE69 WB CH13 156.575 0.0 156.575 0.0 MARINE71 WB CH14 163.100 0.0 163.100 0.0 CREWNET NB

Page 154: FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF …€¦ · 07/11/2011  · FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF COASTAL ALASKA 2009 Forest Inventory and Analysis Program

Annual Inventory 2009 APPENDIX 1 – RADIO INFORMATION

146

Page 155: FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF …€¦ · 07/11/2011  · FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF COASTAL ALASKA 2009 Forest Inventory and Analysis Program

Annual Inventory 2009 APPENDIX 2 - METRIC EQUIVALENTS

147

Appendix 2 -- Metric Equivalents

Length

1 inch = 2.54 centimeters (cm.) 0.1 feet = 3.048 centimeters (cm.) 1 foot = 0.3048 meter (m.) 1 mile = 1.609 kilometers (km.)

1 centimeter (cm.) = .03 foot (ft.) 1 meter (m.) = 3.2808 feet (ft.)

Area 1 acre = 0.4 hectare (ha.) (approximately) 5 acres = 2 hectares (ha.) (approximately)

1,000 acres = 404.7 hectares (ha.) 1 hectare = 2.471 acres (ac.) 2.5 hectares = 6 acres (ac.) (approximately)

Condition class minimum area

0.4 hectares (1 acre) = 4,000 square meters = 40 meters x 100 meters = 35 meter radius circle

1 acre = 120 feet x 363 feet

= 209 feet x 209 feet = 118 foot radius circle = 43,560 square feet

Basal Area Factor

Metric units: each selected tree represents XX square meters of basal area per ha. English units: each selected tree represents XX square feet of basal area per acre.

English Metric

15 3.44 20 4.59 30 6.88

30.5 7

Page 156: FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF …€¦ · 07/11/2011  · FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF COASTAL ALASKA 2009 Forest Inventory and Analysis Program

Annual Inventory 2009 APPENDIX 2 - METRIC EQUIVALENTS

148

Metric System - Length

1 meter = 10 decimeters (dm.) 1 meter = 100 centimeters (cm.) 1 meter = 1,000 millimeters (mm.)

and:

0.001 meters = 1 millimeter 0.01 meters = 1 centimeter 0.1 meters = 1 decimeter 1 meter = 1 meter 10 meters = 1 decameter 100 meters = 1 hectometer 1,000 meters = 1 kilometer

Photo Scales

Scale Length on Photo Length on Ground

1:15,840 1 mm. 15.8 meters 1:24,000 1 mm. 24.0 meters 1:31,680 1 mm. 31.7 meters 1:40,000 1 mm. 40.0 meters

1:15,840 1 inch 1,320 feet 0.1 inch 132 feet 0.05 inch (1/20) 66 feet

1:24,000 1 inch 2,000 feet

0.1 inch 200 feet 0.05 inch (1/20) 100 feet

1:31,680 1 inch 2,640 feet

0.1 inch 264 feet 0.05 inch (1/20) 132 feet

1:40,000 1 inch 3,333 feet

0.1 inch 333 feet 0.05 inch (1/20) 166 feet

Page 157: FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF …€¦ · 07/11/2011  · FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF COASTAL ALASKA 2009 Forest Inventory and Analysis Program

Annual Inventory 2009 APPENDIX 3 - SLOPE CORRECTION TABLE

149

Appendix 3 -- Slope Correction Table

EXPANSIONEXPANSION FACTOR

-SLOPE DISTANCE-

PERCENT FACTOR RECIPROCAL24.0 ft. 100 ft. 10 1.005 0.995 24.1 100.5 15 1.01 0.99 24.3 101.1 20 1.02 0.98 24.5 102.0 25 1.03 0.97 24.7 103.1 30 1.04 0.96 25.1 104.4 35 1.06 0.94 25.4 105.9 40 1.08 0.93 25.8 107.7 45 1.10 0.91 26.3 109.7 50 1.12 0.89 26.8 111.8 55 1.14 0.88 27.4 114.1 60 1.17 0.86 28.0 116.6 65 1.19 0.84 28.6 119.3 70 1.22 0.82 29.3 122.1 75 1.25 0.80 30.0 125.0 80 1.28 0.78 30.7 128.1 85 1.31 0.76 31.5 131.2 90 1.35 0.74 32.3 134.5 95 1.38 0.72 33.1 137.9 100 1.41 0.71 33.9 141.4 105 1.45 0.69 34.8 145.0 110 1.49 0.67 35.7 148.7 115 1.52 0.66 36.6 152.4 120 1.56 0.64 37.5 156.2 125 1.60 0.62 38.4 160.1 130 1.64 0.61 39.4 164.0 135 1.68 0.60 40.3 168.0 140 1.72 0.58 41.3 172.0 145 1.76 0.57 42.3 176.1 150 1.80 0.55 43.3 180.3 155 1.84 0.54 44.3 184.5

Page 158: FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF …€¦ · 07/11/2011  · FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF COASTAL ALASKA 2009 Forest Inventory and Analysis Program

Annual Inventory 2009 APPENDIX 4 – DETERMINATION OF STOCKING VALUES

150

Appendix 4 -- Determination of Stocking Values for Land Use Classification

Stocking values are required to determine if a CONDITION STATUS = 1 (accessible forest land) exists on a plot. This will determine which data items must be recorded for the condition. When the CONDITION STATUS is in question (usually a nonforest area that is in the process of reverting to forest land or a marginal site that can only support a low number of trees), the crew must determine if there is sufficient stocking to classify the condition as forest. A minimum stocking value of 10 percent is required for accessible forest land (unless the condition was previously forested, such as a recent clear cut). The following tables show the stocking values to assign to trees to determine if a plot meets the minimum stocking to be considered forest land. In the determination of stocking for this purpose, the field crew should consider the condition over its entire area, not just the trees and seedlings that would be tallied on the subplots and microplots, especially when the plot straddles conditions. Also, for stocking purposes, consider a clump of trees (e.g., stump sprouts) less than 5 inches DBH to be a single tree. Observe all of the trees on the plot and classify the condition, based on the tree with the largest DBH, into one of the following groups; the largest tree observed has a DBH of 5 inches or greater, 4.0-4.9 inches, 3.0-3.9 inches, 2.0-2.9 inches, 1.0-1.9 inches or less than 1.0 inch DBH. If you are using the Stocking Values table to determine if the condition meets minimum stocking, use tables 5a and 5b (below). When using a Stocking Values table, begin a tally of each subplot and microplot and sum the stocking values for each tree tallied based upon its species and size class. When the stocking values for the tallied trees equals or exceeds 10, the condition meets the minimum stocking requirement for forest land. For example, a condition that was formerly nonforest is no longer being maintained as nonforest and has begun to revert. A check of all four subplots and microplots confirms that the largest tree present is in the 3.0 – 3.9 inches DBH class. The tally of microplot 1 is one white spruce (species code = 094) seedling. The sum of the stocking value (table 5a) to this point is 1.8 and the tally continues on microplot 2.

Subplot Number

Plot Type Species Size Class Number Tallied

Stocking Value

1 2 094 < 1.0 1 1.8 Total 1.8

The tally at microplot 2 is two white spruce seedlings. The stocking value for the two seedlings is 3.6. The cumulative stocking value to this point is 5.4. Since the minimum value of 10 percent stocking has not been reached, the tally continues to subplot 3.

Page 159: FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF …€¦ · 07/11/2011  · FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF COASTAL ALASKA 2009 Forest Inventory and Analysis Program

Annual Inventory 2009 APPENDIX 4 - DETERMINATION OF STOCKING VALUES

151

Subplot Number

Plot Type Species Size Class Number Tallied

Stocking Value

1 2 094 < 1.0 1 1.8 2 2 094 < 1.0 2 3.6 Total 5.4

At microplot 3, two white spruce (species code = 318) saplings in the 1.0 – 1.9-inch DBH class are tallied. The cumulative stocking value is now 12.8 and the condition meets the minimum stocking to be considered forest land.

Subplot Number

Plot Type Species Size Class Number Tallied

Stocking Value

1 2 094 < 1.0 1 1.8 2 2 094 < 1.0 2 3.6 3 2 094 1.0 – 1.9 2 7.4 Total 12.8

When trees of more than one diameter class are present, their contribution towards meeting the minimum must be combined. For example: In a lodgepole pine stand (species code = 108), the largest tree in the condition is 5.0+ inches DBH. If at least 20 trees that are 5.0-6.9 inches DBH are found on the four subplots, the minimum stocking of 10 percent (table 5b: 3rd row, 1st column) is met. In the same condition only 5 tally trees in the 13.0-14.9-inch DBH class are needed to meet minimum stocking of 10 percent. If the tally were three 5.0-6.9-inch trees and two 13.0-14.9-inch DBH class trees (total stocking of 3 x 0.5 + 2 x 2.2 = 5.9), the combined stocking would not meet the minimum 10 percent (5.9 < 10) and the condition would be classified nonforest. If there is a transition zone between two conditions use your best judgment to be sure that trees tallied in the transition zone do not have too much weight in the assignment of a land use

Page 160: FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF …€¦ · 07/11/2011  · FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF COASTAL ALASKA 2009 Forest Inventory and Analysis Program

Annual Inventory 2009 APPENDIX 4 – DETERMINATION OF STOCKING VALUES

152

Table 5a. Stocking values for all tallied trees on the four subplots and microplots DBH of the largest tally tree in the condition

5.0+ 4.0-4.9 3.0-3.9 2.0-2.9 1.0-1.9 Seedling

DBH of tally tree DBH of tally tree DBH of tally tree DBH of tally tree DBH of tally tree

Species 5.0-6.9

4.0-4.9

3.0-3.9

2.0-2.9

1.0-1.9

Seed-ling

4.0-4.9

3.0-3.9

2.0-2.9

1.0-1.9

Seed-ling

3.0-3.9

2.0-2.9

1.0-1.9

Seed-ling

2.0-2.9

1.0-1.9

Seed-ling

1.0-1.9

Seed-ling

Seedling

(019) subalpine fir (094) white spruce

0.7 6.9 5.2 4.0 2.6 1.2 7.9 6.2 4.6 3.0 1.4 7.6 5.7 3.7 1.8 7.4 4.9 2.3 7.2 3.5 7.0

(095) black spruce 0.7 6.2 4.7 3.6 2.3 1.1 7.1 5.6 4.2 2.7 1.3 6.9 5.1 3.3 1.6 6.7 4.4 2.1 6.5 3.2 6.3

(108) lodgepole pine 0.5 5.0 3.7 2.9 1.9 0.8 5.7 4.5 3.3 2.2 1.0 5.5 4.1 2.7 1.3 5.4 3.5 1.7 5.2 2.5 5.1

(011) Pacific silver fir (042) AK yellow cedar (098) Sitka spruce (231) Pacific yew (242) western redcedar (263) western hemlock (264) mountain hemlock

0.5 4.8 3.6 2.8 1.8 0.8 5.4 4.3 3.2 2.1 1.0 5.3 3.9 2.6 1.2 5.1 3.4 1.6 5.0 2.4 4.8

(351) red alder 1.3 11.7 8.8 6.8 4.4 2.0 13.3 10.6 7.9 5.1 2.4 13.0 9.6 6.3 3.0 12.6 8.3 4.0 12.3 5.9 11.9

(375) paper birch 1.1 10.5 7.9 6.1 4.0 1.8 12.0 9.5 7.1 4.6 2.1 11.6 8.7 5.7 2.7 11.3 7.4 3.6 11.0 5.3 10.7

(746) quaking aspen 1.2 10.9 8.3 6.4 4.1 1.9 12.5 9.9 7.3 4.8 2.2 12.1 9.0 5.9 2.8 11.8 7.8 3.7 11.5 5.6 11.1

(747) black cottonwood

1.2 10.8 8.1 6.3 4.1 1.8 12.3 9.8 7.2 4.7 2.2 12.0 8.9 5.8 2.7 11.6 7.6 3.7 11.3 5.5 11.0

Page 161: FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF …€¦ · 07/11/2011  · FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF COASTAL ALASKA 2009 Forest Inventory and Analysis Program

Annual Inventory 2009 APPENDIX 4 - DETERMINATION OF STOCKING VALUES

153

Table 5b. Stocking values for all trees tallied on the subplot only

Species 5.0-6.9

7.0-8.9

9.0-10.9

11.0-12.9

13.0-14.9

15.0-16.9

17.0-18.9

19.0-20.9

21.0-22.9

23.0-24.9

25.0-26.9

27.0-28.9 29.0+

(019) subalpine fir (094) white spruce

0.7 1.1 1.6 2.1 2.6 3.2 3.8 4.4 5.1 5.8 6.5 7.2 8.0

(095) black spruce 0.7 0.9 1.1 1.4 1.6 1.9 2.1 2.4 2.6 2.9 3.1 3.4 3.6

(108) lodgepole pine 0.5 0.9 1.3 1.7 2.2 2.8 3.4 4.1 4.8 5.6 6.4 7.3 8.2

(011) Pacific silver fir (042) Alaska yellow cedar (098) Sitka spruce (231) Pacific yew (242) western redcedar (263) western hemlock (264) mountain hemlock

0.5 0.8 1.2 1.6 2.1 2.6 3.2 3.8 4.5 5.2 5.9 6.7 7.5

(351) red alder 1.3 1.9 2.6 3.3 4.1 5.0 5.9 6.8 7.8 8.9 9.9 11.0 12.1

(375) paper birch 1.1 1.9 3.0 4.2 5.6 7.2 9.0 11.0 13.1 15.5 18.0 20.7 23.6

(746) quaking aspen 1.2 1.8 2.5 3.2 4.0 4.9 5.8 6.8 7.8 8.9 10.0 11.1 12.3

(747) black cottonwood 1.2 2.0 3.0 4.2 5.6 7.2 8.9 10.9 13.0 15.2 17.7 20.3 23.1

Page 162: FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF …€¦ · 07/11/2011  · FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF COASTAL ALASKA 2009 Forest Inventory and Analysis Program

Annual Inventory 2009 APPENDIX 5 – GLOSSARY

154

Appendix 5 -- Glossary Accessible Forest Land – Land that is within sampled area (the population of interest), is accessible and can safely be visited, and meets the following criteria: (a) The condition is at least 10-percent stocked by trees (appendix 3) of any size or has been at

least 10-percent stocked in the past. Additionally, the condition is not subject to nonforest use(s) that prevent normal tree regeneration and succession such as regular mowing, grazing, or recreation activities, or

ACTUAL LENGTH – For trees with broken or missing tops. The actual length of the tree is recorded to the nearest 1.0 foot from ground level to the highest remaining portion of the tree still present and attached to the bole. If the top is intact, this item may be omitted. Forked trees should be treated the same as unforked trees. Agricultural Land – Land managed for crops, pasture, or other agricultural use. Evidence includes geometric field and road patterns, fencing, and the traces produced by livestock or mechanized equipment. The area must be at least 1.0 acre in size and 120.0 feet. wide at the point of occurrence. ARTIFICIAL REGENERATION SPECIES – Indicates the predominant species that is planted or seeded in an artificially regenerated condition. Blind check – a re-installation done by a qualified inspection crew without production crew data on hand; a full re-installation of the plot for the purpose of obtaining a measure of data quality. The two data sets are maintained separately. Discrepancies between the two sets of data are not reconciled. Blind checks are done on production plots only. Bole – The main stem of a tree, extending from one foot above the ground to the point on the tree where DOB reaches 4 inches Boundary – The intersection of two or more conditions on a subplot or microplot. Each boundary is described by recording the azimuth and horizontal distance from the subplot or microplot center to the left and right points of where the boundary intersects the perimeter of the subplot or microplot. An azimuth and distance to a corner point may also be described, if one exists. If multiple boundaries exist at a subplot, they are recorded in the order of their occurrence on the subplot, starting from north and proceeding around the compass. Census Water – Rivers, streams, canals, etc., that are more than 200 feet wide and lakes, reservoirs, ponds and similar bodies of water that are greater than 4.5 acres in size. Certification plot – a plot installed by a certification candidate. It may be a training plot or a production plot. The candidate, working alone, installs the plot. Cold check – an inspection done either as part of the training process, or as part of the ongoing QA/QC program. Normally the installation crew is not present at the time of inspection. The inspector has the completed data in-hand at the time of inspection. The inspection can include the whole plot or a subset of the plot. Discrepancies between the two sets of data may be reconciled. Cold checks are done on production plots only.

Page 163: FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF …€¦ · 07/11/2011  · FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF COASTAL ALASKA 2009 Forest Inventory and Analysis Program

Annual Inventory 2009 APPENDIX 5 GLOSSARY

155

CONDITION CLASS – The combination of discrete landscape and forest attributes that identify and define different strata on the plot. Examples of such attributes include condition status, forest type, stand origin, stand size, owner group, reserve status and stand density. Cropland – Land under cultivation within the past 24 months, including orchards and land in soil improving crops, but excluding land cultivated in developing improved pasture. CROWN CLASS – A classification of trees based on dominance in relation to adjacent trees within the stand as indicated by crown development and the amount of sunlight received from above and sides. Cull – Portions of a tree that are unusable for industrial wood products because of rot, form, or other defect. Diameter at Breast Height (DBH) – The diameter of the bole of a tree at breast height (4.5 feet above the ground/root collar), measured outside of the bark. Diameter Outside Bark (DOB) – A diameter that may be taken at various points on a tree, or log, outside of the bark. Diameter Outside Bark is often estimated. Federal Information Processing Standard (FIPS) – A unique code identifying U.S. States and counties (or units in Alaska). Forest Industry Land – Land owned by companies or individuals that operate wood-using plants. Forest Trees – Plants having a well-developed, woody stem and usually more than 12 feet in height at maturity. FOREST TYPE – A classification of forest land based upon the trees or tree communities that constitute the majority of stocking on the site. Hot check – an inspection normally done as part of the training process. The inspector is present on the plot with the trainee and provides immediate feedback regarding data quality. Data errors are corrected. Hot checks can be done on training plots or production plots. Idle Farmland -- Former cropland or pasture that has not been tended within the last 2 years and that has less than 10 percent stocking with live trees. Improved Pasture -- Land that is currently maintained and used for grazing. Evidence of maintenance, besides the degree of grazing, includes condition of fencing, presence of stock ponds, periodic brush removal, seeding, irrigation, or mowing. Inclusion – An area that would generally would be recognized as a separate condition, except that it is not large enough to qualify. For example, a ½ acre pond within a forested stand. Industrial Wood – All roundwood products, except firewood.

Page 164: FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF …€¦ · 07/11/2011  · FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF COASTAL ALASKA 2009 Forest Inventory and Analysis Program

Annual Inventory 2009 APPENDIX 5 – GLOSSARY

156

Inspection crew – a crew of qualified QC/QA individuals whose primary responsibility is the training, certification and inspection of production crews. Land Area – As defined by the Bureau of the Census: The area of dry land and land temporarily or partially covered by water such as marshes, swamps, and river flood plains (omitting tidal flats below mean tide); streams, sloughs, estuaries and canals less than 200 feet in width, and ponds less than 4.5 acres in area. Maintained Road – Any road, hard topped or other surfaces, that is plowed or graded periodically and capable of use by a large vehicle. Rights-of-way that are cut or treated to limit herbaceous growth are included in this area. Marsh – Low, wet areas characterized by heavy growth of weeds and grasses and an absence of trees. Measurement Quality Objective (MQO) – Describes the acceptable tolerance for each data element. MQOs consist of two parts: a statement of the tolerance and a percentage of time when the collected data are required to be within tolerance. Merchantable Top – The point on the bole of trees above which merchantable material cannot be produced. Merchantable top is 4.0 inches for all species. Microplot – A circular, fixed-radius plot with a radius of 6.8 feet that is used to sample trees less than 5.0 inches at DBH, as well as other vegetation. National Forest Land – Federal lands which have been legally designated as National Forests or purchase units, and other lands under the administration of the Forest Service, including experimental areas and Bankhead-Jones Title III lands. Native American (Indian) Land – Tribal lands held in fee, or trust, by the Federal government but administered for Indian tribal groups and Indian trust allotments. This land is considered “Private Lands”, Owner Group 40. Non-census Water – Lakes, reservoirs, ponds, and similar bodies of water from 1 to 4.5 acres in size and rivers, streams, canals, etc., from 30 feet to 200 feet in width. Nonforest Land -- Land that does not now support, or has never supported, forests and lands formerly forested where use for timber management is precluded by development for other uses. Includes areas used for crops, improved pasture, residential areas, city parks, improved roads of any width and adjoining rights-of-way, power line clearings of any width, and noncensus water. If intermingled in forest areas, unimproved roads and nonforest strips must be more than 120.0 feet wide, and clearings, etc., more than one acre in size, to qualify as nonforest land. Nonstockable – Areas of forest land that are not capable of supporting trees because of the presence of rock, water, etc. Other Federal Lands – Federal land other than National Forests. These include lands administered by the USDI Bureau of Land Management, USDI National Park Service, USDI Fish

Page 165: FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF …€¦ · 07/11/2011  · FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF COASTAL ALASKA 2009 Forest Inventory and Analysis Program

Annual Inventory 2009 APPENDIX 5 GLOSSARY

157

and Wildlife Service, Department of Defense, Department of Energy, Army Corps of Engineers, and military bases. OWNER CLASS -- A variable that classifies land into fine categories of ownership. OWNER GROUP – A variable that classifies land into broad categories of ownership; Forest Service, Other Federal Agency, State and Local Government, and Private. Differing categories of Owner Group on a plot require different conditions. Phase 1 (P1) – FIA activities done as part of remote-sensing and/or aerial photography. Phase 2 (P2) – FIA activities done on the network of ground plots formerly known as FIA plots. Phase 3 (P3) – FIA activities done on a subset of Phase 2 plots formerly known as Forest Health Monitoring plots. Additional ecological indicator information is collected from Phase 3 plots. Plot – A cluster of four subplots that samples approximately 1/6 acre. The subplots are established so that subplot 1 is centered within the sample and the centers of subplots 2, 3, and 4 are located 120.0 feet from the center of subplot 1 at azimuths of 360, 120, and 240 degrees, respectively. Each subplot has an associated microplot and annular plot Plurality - a majority, for example; if there are three tree species distributed throughout a condition, the species with the majority of stocking in the condition would be considered the FOREST TYPE species for that condition. PRIVATE OWNER INDUSTRIAL STATUS – Indicates whether Private land owners own and operate a wood processing plant. Production crew – a crew containing at least one certified individual. The crew is involved in routine installation of plots. Production plot – a plot that belongs to the 6000-acre grid database. It may also be used for training purposes. REGENERATION STATUS – A stand descriptor that indicates whether a stand has been naturally or artificially regenerated. Reserved Land – Land that is withdrawn from timber utilization by a public agency or by law. RESERVE STATUS – An indication of whether the land in a condition has been reserved. Saplings – Live trees 1.0 to 4.9 inches DBH. Seedlings – Live trees less than 1.0 DBH that are at least 6 inches (conifers) or one foot tall (hardwoods). STAND AGE – A stand descriptor that indicates the average age of the live trees not overtopped in the predominant stand size-class of a condition.

Page 166: FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF …€¦ · 07/11/2011  · FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF COASTAL ALASKA 2009 Forest Inventory and Analysis Program

Annual Inventory 2009 APPENDIX 5 – GLOSSARY

158

STAND DENSITY – A stand descriptor that indicates the relative tree density of a condition class. The classification is based on the number of stems/unit area, basal area, tree cover, or stocking of all live trees in the condition which are not overtopped, compared to any previously defined condition class tree density. STAND SIZE – A stand descriptor that indicates which size-class of trees that are not overtopped constitutes the majority of stocking in the stand. State, County and Municipal Lands – Lands owned by states, counties, and local public agencies or municipalities, or lands leased to these government units for 50 years or more. Stocking – The relative degree of occupancy land by trees, measured as basal area or the number of trees in a stand by size or age and spacing, compared to the basal area or number of trees required to fully utilize the growth potential of the land; that is, the stocking standard. Subplot – A circular, fixed-area plot with a radius of 24.0 feet. Each subplot represents ¼ of the fixed plot sample unit. TOTAL LENGTH – The total length of the tree, recorded to the nearest 1.0 foot from ground level to the tip of the apical meristem. For trees growing on a slope, measure on the uphill side of the tree. If the tree has a broken or missing top, the total length is estimated to what the length would be if there were no missing or broken top. Forked trees should be treated the same as unforked trees Training plot – a plot established for training or certification purposes only. It does NOT belong to the 6000-acre grid database. Transition Zone – An area where a distinct boundary between two or more different conditions cannot be determined.

Page 167: FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF …€¦ · 07/11/2011  · FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF COASTAL ALASKA 2009 Forest Inventory and Analysis Program

Annual Inventory 2009 APPENDIX 6 - CUBIC FOOT VOLUME TABLE

159

Appendix 6 -- Cubic Foot Volume Table

PERCENT DISTRIBUTION OF CUBIC FOOT VOLUMELog Postion (volume/ 8ft. section)

0.5 1 1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 5.5 6 6.5 71 52 43

1.5 44 36 152 36 29 17 14

2.5 31 26 17 13 93 27 22 17 13 10 8

3.5 25 20 15 13 10 8 64 22 18 14 12 10 9 7 5

4.5 20 17 14 11 10 8 8 6 45 19 15 13 10 10 8 8 6 5 4

5.5 18 14 12 10 10 8 8 6 6 5 36 17 13 11 9 9 8 7 6 6 5 4 3

6.5 15 13 11 9 9 8 7 6 6 5 4 3 27 14 12 11 9 9 8 7 6 6 5 4 3 2 2

Tre

e H

eig

ht

(lo

gs)

1 Log = 16 feet 0.5 Log = 8 feet

Page 168: FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF …€¦ · 07/11/2011  · FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF COASTAL ALASKA 2009 Forest Inventory and Analysis Program

Annual Inventory 2009 APPENDIX 7 – FORMS

160

Appendix 7 -- Forms AK PLOT LEVEL DATA FORM

PLOT # ________________ DATE ____/____/____

Item# Description

3 QA STATUS . PLOT ATTRIBUTES

4 PNW PLOT KIND . 5 AK DATA SOURCE . 6 PLOT STATUS . 7 AK PLOT NONSAMPLED REASON (Plot Nons Rsn) . . 8 SUBPLOTS EXAMINED 9 AK Condition Class Status 1 (CC1 Status) . 10 AK Estimated Nonsampled Land Cover Type (NonS Land Cvr) . . . 11 AK Previous Plot Number (Prev Plt Num) . . . . . 12 AK Start DateE . ./. ./. . . . 13 HORIZONTAL DISTANCE TO IMPROVED ROAD . 14 WATER ON PLOT (Water Plot) . 15 CREW TYPE . 16 PNW Crew Leader (Crew Lead) 17 PNW Crew Member 1 PNW Crew Member 2 PNW Crew Member 3 PNW Crew Member 4 PNW Crew Member 5

18 PNW Landowner Plot Summary Request (Own Request) . 19 END DATE . ./. ./. . . . 20 AK Transportation To Plot 21 PNW Travel Time To Plot 22 PNW Measurement Time On Plot 23 PNW Travel Time From Plot 24 AK P2/P3 Plot Type . 25 PLOT LEVEL NOTES

GPS INFO 30 AK GPS Location Type (L) . . . 31 AK GPS UNIT TYPE (T) . . . 32 AK GPS SERIAL NUMBER (ID/Ser#) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 AK GPS DATUM 34 AK COORDINATE SYSTEM (C) . . . 35 AK GPS LATITUDE DEGREES (Lt) . . . . . . 36 AK GPS LATITUDE MINUTES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 AK GPS LONGITUDE DEGREES (Long) . . . . . . . . . 38 AK GPS LONGITUDE MINUTES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 AK NUMBER OF READINGS (Num) . . . . . . . . . 40 AK GPS ERROR (Err) . . . . . . . . . 41 AK GPS ELEVATION (Elevat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 AK AZIMUTH TO PLOT CENTER (Azm) . . . . . . . . . 43 AK DISTANCE TO PLOT CENTER (Dist) . . . . . . . . . 44 AK GPS Notes RP INFO

45 AK RP Type . 46 AK RP Species (Spc) . . . 47 AK RP Diameter (Diam) . . . 48 PNW RP Azimuth (Azm) . . . 49 PNW RP Horizontal Distance (Dist) . . . . 50 PNW RP Az/Dist to Subplot # (S) . 51 AK RP Notes

Page 169: FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF …€¦ · 07/11/2011  · FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF COASTAL ALASKA 2009 Forest Inventory and Analysis Program

Annual Inventory 2009 APPENDIX 7 FORMS

161

AK CONDITION CLASS ATTRIBUTE DATA FORM

PLOT # ________________ DATE ____/____/____

1 CONDITION CLASS NUMBER 1 2 3 4 5 6

2 CONDITION CLASS STATUS . . . . . .

3 AK CONDITION NONSAMPLED REASON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4 AK Estimated Nonsample Land Cover Type . . . . . . . . . . . .

5 RESERVED STATUS . . . . . .

6 OWNER GROUP . . . . . . . . . . . .

7 FOREST TYPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8 STAND SIZE CLASS . . . . . .

9 REGENERATION STATUS (Regen Status) . . . . . .

10 TREE DENSITY . . . . . .

ANCILLARY (Non-delineating) VARIABLES

11 OWNER CLASS . . . . . . . . . . . .

12 ARTIFICIAL REGENERATION SPECIES (Regen Spc) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

13 STAND AGE

14 DISTURBANCE (Dstrb 1) . . . . . . . . . . . .

15 DISTURBANCE YEAR 1 (Dstrb1 Yr) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

16 DISTURBANCE 2 (Dstrb 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

17 DISTURBANCE YEAR 2 (Dstrb2 Yr) . . . . . . . . . . . .

18 DISTURBANCE 3 (Dstrb 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

19 DISTURBANCE YEAR 3 (Dstrb3 Yr) . . . . . . . . . . . .

20 TREATMENT 1 . . . . . . . . . . . .

21 TREATMENT YEAR 1 (Trtmnt1 Yr) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

22 TREATMENT 2 . . . . . . . . . . . .

23 TREATMENT YEAR 2 (Trtmnt1 Yr) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

24 TREATMENT 3 . . . . . . . . . . . .

25 TREATMENT YEAR 3 (Trtmnt1 Yr) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

26 PHYSIOGRAPHIC CLASS (Physio Cl) . . . . . . . . . . . .

27 PNW PRESENT NON-FOREST LAND USE (NonF Land Use) . . . . . . . . . . . .

27 CONDITION CLASS NOTES-

Page 170: FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF …€¦ · 07/11/2011  · FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF COASTAL ALASKA 2009 Forest Inventory and Analysis Program

Annual Inventory 2009 APPENDIX 7 – FORMS

162

AK SUBPLOT INFORMATION DATA FORM

PLOT # ________________ DATE ____/____/____

1 SUBPLOT # 1 2 3 4 SUBPLOT ATTRIBUTES

2 SUBPLOT PLOT STATUS (Sbplt Status) . . . . 3 SUBPLOT NONSAMPLED REASON (NonS Reason) . . . . 4 AK Estimated Nonsample Land Cover Type (NonS Land Cvr) . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 SUBPLOT CENTER CONDITION . . . . 6 MICROPLOT CENTER CONDITION (Microplot Cond) . . . . 7 SUBPLOT SLOPE (Slope) . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 SUBPLOT ASPECT (Aspect) . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 SNOW/WATER DEPTH (Snow/Water Dept) . . . . . . . .

10 AK Vegetation Community Description for Label

11 SUBPLOT NOTES

INVASIVE PLANT SPECIES 1. AK

Subplot Number

2. AK Species 3. AK

Percent Cover

4. AK Unique Species Number

5.AK Specimen Officially Collected

6.AK Specimen

Label Number

7. AK Spec Not Off Coll

Reason

8. AK Invasive Plant Notes

SUBPLOT MAPPING/BOUNDARY DATA 1 SUBPLOT NUMBER . . . . 2 PLOT TYPE (P) . . . . 3 CONTRASTING CONDITION (C) . . . . 4 LEFT AZIMUTH (LAzm) . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 RIGHT AZIMUTH (RAzm) . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 CORNER AZIMUTH (CAzm) . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 CORNER DISTANCE (CDist) . . . . . . . . 8 BOUNDARY NOTES

SEEDLING DATA 4. SEEDLING COUNT

Subplot 1 Subplot 2 Subplot 3 Subplot 4

2. SPECIES: CC1 CC2 CC3 CC1 CC2 CC3 CC1 CC2 CC3 CC1 CC2 CC3

5. SEEDLING NOTES

Page 171: FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF …€¦ · 07/11/2011  · FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF COASTAL ALASKA 2009 Forest Inventory and Analysis Program

Annual Inventory 2009 APPENDIX 7 FORMS

163

AK TREE AND SAPLING DATA FORM PLOT # ________________ DATE ____/____/____ PAGE ____ OF____

P3 Crown Variables

SU

BP

LOT

NU

MB

ER

TR

EE

NU

MB

ER

(T

rn)

CO

ND

CLA

SS

NB

R (

C)

PN

W P

RE

S.T

RE

E S

TA

TU

S

PN

W S

ubpl

ot W

it. F

lag

AK

ST

AN

DIN

G D

EA

D

AK

RE

CO

NC

ILE

(i)

SP

EC

IES

AZ

IMU

TH

HO

RIZ

ON

TA

L D

IST

.

PN

W S

lope

Dis

t. to

Wit.

DIA

ME

TE

R

AK

DIA

ME

TE

R C

HE

CK

PN

W 1

0-Y

r In

cre

men

t

AC

TU

AL

LEN

GT

H

AK

LE

NG

TH

ME

TH

OD

TO

TA

L LE

NG

TH

CO

MP

AC

TE

D C

RO

WN

R

AT

IO (

cR)

CR

OW

N C

LAS

S (

c)

RO

TT

EN

/MIS

SIN

G C

ULL

(r

c)

AK

tre

e cl

ass

(E)

DE

CA

Y C

LAS

S (

d)

AK

MO

RT

AL

ITY

YE

AR

AK

CA

US

E O

F D

EA

TH

(c

d)

UN

CO

MP

AC

TE

D L

IVE

C

RO

WN

RA

TIO

CR

OW

N L

IGH

T

EX

PO

SU

RE

CR

OW

N P

OS

ITIO

N

CR

OW

N V

IGO

R C

LAS

S

CR

OW

N D

EN

SIT

Y

CR

OW

N D

IEB

AC

K

FO

LIA

GE

T

RA

NS

PA

RE

NC

Y

TR

EE

NO

TE

S

1 2 3 5 6 7 8 10 12 14 15 17 18 19 20 21 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 12.5 12.6

12.712.8

12.9 12.10 12.11 31

x xxx x x x x x xxx xxx xx.y xx.y xxx.y x xxx xxx x xxx xx x xx x x xxxx xx xx x x x xx xx xx

Page 172: FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF …€¦ · 07/11/2011  · FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF COASTAL ALASKA 2009 Forest Inventory and Analysis Program

Annual Inventory 2009 APPENDIX 7 – FORMS

164

SITE TREE DATA FORM

PLOT # ________________ DATE ____/____/____

AK

SIT

E /A

GE

T

RE

E #

(N

o)

SU

B P

LOT

N

UM

BE

R (

Sb)

AK

Site

/Age

T

ree

Sta

tus

AK

Site

/Age

T

ree

Typ

e

AK

Q

uest

ion

able

T

ree

Fla

g

CO

ND

ITIO

N

CLA

SS

LIS

T

(C)

AK

Tal

ly T

ree

Num

ber

AZ

IMU

TH

HO

RIZ

ON

TA

L D

IST

AN

CE

SP

EC

IES

DIA

ME

TE

R

(Dbh

)

SIT

E T

RE

E

LEN

GT

H (

Ht)

TR

EE

AG

E A

T

DIA

ME

TE

R

(Age

)

AK

Age

M

etho

d

SIT

E T

RE

E

NO

TE

S

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Site Tree Notes-

Page 173: FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF …€¦ · 07/11/2011  · FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF COASTAL ALASKA 2009 Forest Inventory and Analysis Program

Annual Inventory 2009 APPENDIX 7 FORMS

165

Alaska Coastal Annual Inventory Location Record PLOT NUMBER: START DATE: / / END DATE: / / CREW LEADER: CREW MEMBERS:

RP DATA

Species Diameter in. Azimuth Horiz. dist. ft. To subplot

RP LOCATION AND TRAVEL DESCRIPTION:

PRESENT CONDITION / PAST DISTURBANCE

LOCATION SKETCH MAP: N

LOCATION CHECKLIST: ___ Monumentation:

___Witness ___RP ___GPS coordinates collected (LZ, RP, PC) ___Condition Class (Boundary mapping) ___Tree Record (Tree & Sapling, Seedling) ___Photo work (Pinprick, data on back) ___Site Trees (3 site/age per species, per condition) ___Plot level data (Also Subplot Information) QA Reviewer: Date:

2

1

3 4

P3 Checklist

___ Vegetation ___ Lichens ___ DWM

Crowns

PLOT TRAVEL TIME Travel time to plot : Measurement time : Travel time from plot :

Page 174: FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF …€¦ · 07/11/2011  · FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF COASTAL ALASKA 2009 Forest Inventory and Analysis Program

Annual Inventory 2009 APPENDIX 9 QA/QC Check Plots

166

Appendix 8 -- Equipment Checklist

Laser…………………....... 1 or 2 GPS…………………................ 1 FM Radio …………………….. 1 Allegro………………............... 1 Shotgun/Ammo 1 shotgun/10-20 Slugs............... 1 Satellite Phone………………... 1 Cell Phone……………………. 1 Folding Saw…….. 1 per person Bivi Bag………… 1 or 2 per crew Location Folder: a) Photo Set…………………. All b) Loc. Record………………. 1 Stereoscope…………………… 1 Square Witness Tags…………. 7+ Round Witness Tags……........ 12+ White Plot Pins……………….. 4+ Yellow Plot Pins….................... 4+ Flagging………......................... 1 First Aid Kit………………….. 1 Calculator…………………...... 1 Extra Batteries………………... 9+ Clam Shell w/ Batteries............. 1 Compass.................................... 1 Clinometer……………………. 1 Loggers Tape…………………. 1 D-Tape………………………... 1 Hard Hat.................................... 1 Water......................................... 2+

Carpenters Tape…………......... 1 Field Manual…………............. 1 100 ft Tape………………….... 1 Increment Borer……………..... 1 Hatchet……………….............. 1 Nails.......................................... 1 Tree Crayon……………........... 1 Tatum…………………............ 1 Protractor, (Photo Scale)........... 1 Field Forms (Tree/PlotLay/ConCl/SubInfo /Site).......................................... 1 Pin For Pinprick…………….... 1 Pencils………………………... 1 Sharpie (Fine Point)…........…………………. 1 Cruisers Vest…………………. 1 Nail Puller..…………………... 1 Incr. Core Straws…………....... 3 Rite in the Rain Notebook……........................... 1 Reflector……………………… 1 Hand Lens……………………. 1 Ruler w/Tenths and Twentieths Scale……………….................. 1 Bug Dope................................... 1 Head Net.................................... 1 Gear Belt................................... 1 Lunch......................................... 1

Flight PPE……………………… Nomex Flight Suit Nomex Flight Vest (with survival gear) Nomex gloves Leather or Ruber Boots 8” or taller Safety Glasses Ear plugs ***Remember… no synthetic clothing!

Page 175: FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF …€¦ · 07/11/2011  · FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF COASTAL ALASKA 2009 Forest Inventory and Analysis Program

Annual Inventory 2009 APPENDIX 9 QA/QC Check Plots

167

APPENDIX 9 QA/QC Check Plots

A. QA/QC Plot Selection Due to the unique logistics of the Coastal Alaska Inventory field “QA Plots” in Alaska are composed of co-located Blind and Cold checks. Co-location is used to maximize the efficiency of the QA/QC crew. Due to the additional time required to conduct a Cold Check, the decision was made to thoroughly examine two randomly selected subplots: the remaining two will have a rough examination focusing on the key components of the subplot. A Blind Check is a location inspection where either QA/QC personnel or a field crew re-measure a previously installed field location with a purpose of obtaining an estimate of measurement error. The Blind Check is completed without the inspectors looking at the production crews data. The results of Blind Checks are analyzed at a regional and national level. The Blind Check is not used to evaluate a crew’s performance. A Cold Check is where QA/QC personnel inspect a previously installed field location with a purpose of providing feedback about measurement quality and determining whether the quality objectives are being met by the production crew. This inspection is conducted by QA/QC personnel using the previous field crew’s data without the members of production crew being present on location. The location is checked for proper installation and the data is checked for accuracy and completeness. Cold Checks will be documented and tracked, with care being taken to make sure all crew members receive adequate checks and feedback. A computer scoring system based on the established Mean Quality Objective (MQO) for each variable is used to assess the quality of the measurements. Feedback concerning the results of the inspection will be discussed during a review session after the inspection and paperwork are complete. A target of 4% was set as a goal for Blind and Cold Checks; selecting 7% will allow this goal to be met knowing that some plots selected for QA/QC will not be logistically possible to measure (i.e. the boat has moved out of the plot’s range, weather considerations etc.). This will be accomplished by first determining forested and potentially forested locations to be completed during the coming field season and randomly selecting 7% of the field visit plots for “QA plots”. Which locations have been selected as QA/QC check plots will not be known to the field crew until they have completed and downloaded into the field office database. Then at the end of the night the QA/QC staff will check to see if any of that days plots were selected. B. Field QA/QC Check Procedures The first variable that is looked at is the RP. It is imperative that field crews get the RP information correct to help future crews find previously installed plots. It is true that with the correct GPS coordinates crews have been accessing PC on re-measure plots prior to visiting the RP. However, those cases when RP has

Page 176: FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF …€¦ · 07/11/2011  · FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF COASTAL ALASKA 2009 Forest Inventory and Analysis Program

Annual Inventory 2009 APPENDIX 9 QA/QC Check Plots

168

proven to be useful in plot location should not be overlooked. Therefore, variables related to the RP (species, diameter, location) remain important. For newly installed plots, the photo scale calculations and other pertinent information should be checked. Any inconsistencies and errors should be noted in the Cold Check write up. Once the PC is reached, the PC pinprick location should be verified. In Alaska, the plot incorrectly installed by the recent production crew is NOT re-installed by the Blind Check or QA/QC crew. It is re-measured in the location selected by the production crew and the data are used for the Blind Check. C. Blind Check Two randomly selected subplots are re-measured for the Blind Check. These subplots are done exactly as they would be done in a production setting. Initial crew’s plot information and data could be looked at, whereas the recent production crew’s data should be left for a review during the Cold Check. One of the most important things to look for during the Blind Check is to make sure that the tree numbers assigned by the QA/QC crew correspond with the tree numbers assigned by the recent production crew and the initial crew (when the plot is a re-measure). Tree numbers are marked with a paintstick on all tally trees including saplings. In case the QA/QC crew encounters a tree missed by the initial crew but picked up by the recent production crew, the tree should get the same tree number as given by the recent production crew. If the QA/QC crew finds a tree missed by both the initial and recent production crew, that tree needs to get a number that will not interfere with any other tree number on the subplot. The missed tree should be added to the end of the Blind Check tree tally list for that subplot. If the QA/QC crew encounters a tree incorrectly tallied by either the initial or recent production crew, the tree number given to this tree should be skipped and not assigned to any of the newly tallied trees on this subplot. All tree numbers between the recent production crew tally and Blind Check crew tally must match for the analysts to to properly analyze the Blind Check data. Make sure all other data for the Blind Check subplots are filled out (i.e., Subplot Information) and that the subplots edit in “Allegro” and on the laptop. In Plot Level Data all of the Plot Attributes screen will need to be filled out as well as the RP information. The GPS information screen needs to be completed with new coordinates collected at the time of the Blind Check. In Subplot Information and Condition Class all information needs to be completed for all four subplots. CC at Center will need to be filled out for all subplots. There is no need to collect new site trees. D. Cold Check After the Blind Check is completed for both subplots, the file is exited and a new Cold Check file is opened in the PDR. Creating this file populates the Cold Check fields with the data collected during the Blind Check. The QA/QC crew now goes through this data line-by-line and compares it to a printed copy of the recent production crew’s data. Any discrepancies are noted, and those which are outside of tolerance are marked in red. Each of these indentified variables is re-visited and reassessed to establish if the error was on the behalf of the QA/QC

Page 177: FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF …€¦ · 07/11/2011  · FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF COASTAL ALASKA 2009 Forest Inventory and Analysis Program

Annual Inventory 2009 APPENDIX 9 QA/QC Check Plots

169

crew or the production crew. QA/QC crew members should alternate when the variables in question are reassessed. For example, if one individual was measuring tree length during the Blind Check, a different individual should be re-measuring tree length as part of checking procedure. A great attention should be paid to the procedure of error checking and obtaining“true” values for the variables in question. Errors on the behalf of the production crew or the QA/QC crew are then “fixed” in the Cold Check file to reflect the “true” value. E. Integrity of the Plot Data It is fairly common to find some misplaced monumentation installed by the production crew during the QA/QC check. It is the policy of the PNW QA/QC program to never alter the data collected or monuments installed by the production crew UNLESS they represent a hazard to the safety of future crews. We do not move PC pins, microplot pins, subplot pins, re-number trees, move nails etc. In addition, we never alter data in the Blind Check file/location record, or in the production file/location record. There are two exceptions to this rule: a safety hazard, or a major error in the travel directions that would result in significant navigation delay for the future crew. In addition for trees missed by the production crew, a well-visible note should be attached to the production crew’s location record explaining the situation, but the actual data should NOT be changed. For missed trees a note should include the following information:

1. Note from QA crew 2. Tree was missed by the Production crew but tallied by the QA/QC crew 3. Tree info (species, AZ, HD, DBH, HT, etc.)

F. Downloading Data The data from the Blind Check needs to be downloaded and run through the PDR edit program the same as a production location. After all of the Blind Check information is checked for typos and gross mis-key errors, the data are printed like for a production plot and stored in the plot folder alongside the production data. The data from the Cold Check needs to be downloaded and run through the edit program the same as a production data. After all of the Cold Check information is checked for typos and gross mis-key errors the data will be checked against the production crews with the QA scoring program. This will give the production crew a score for Plot Level Data, Condition Class, Tree and Sapling data, and a Total Plot score. G. Review Session The Review Session is an opportunity for QA/QC personnel to provide the field crews with constructive feedback in order to help improve data quality. The QA/QC review session involving the QA/QC and production crew should take place immediately after the plot has been QA-checked, the production crew

Page 178: FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF …€¦ · 07/11/2011  · FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF COASTAL ALASKA 2009 Forest Inventory and Analysis Program

Annual Inventory 2009 APPENDIX 9 QA/QC Check Plots

170

scores have been determined, and the recommendations for the improvement of work quality have been written. All the positive and negative aspects of the production crew performance should be discussed and the evaluation form should be signed by all the members of production and QA/QC crews. Only Cold Check data are used to evaluate crew performance. The comparison between Blind Check and production plots are done at a regional and national level and does not require any discussion between the QA/QC and production crew.

Notes: